Sunteți pe pagina 1din 473

Mold Wizard Design Process

Student Guide
October 2011
MT10420_S — NX 8

Publication Number
mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Proprietary and restricted rights notice

This software and related documentation are proprietary to Siemens Product


Lifecycle Management Software Inc.
© 2011 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Siemens and the Siemens logo are registered trademarks of Siemens AG.
NX is a trademark or registered trademark of Siemens Product Lifecycle
Management Software Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States and in
other countries. All other trademarks, registered trademarks or service
marks belong to their respective holders

2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Contents

Proprietary and restricted rights notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Course overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Course description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Class standards for NX part files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Tips for working with Mold Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Set the role for this course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Lesson format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Initializing a mold design project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1


Initialize Project overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Initialize Project dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Using Initialize Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Initialize Project dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Overwriting safeguard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Mold.V1 template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Original template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
ESI template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Top level template parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Product template parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
ESI template parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Part Name Management overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Part Name Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Use the Part Name Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Part Name Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Part Name Management related topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Shrinkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Shrinkage overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Scale Body dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 3


Contents

Apply Shrinkage to a mold project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4


Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Mold CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1


Mold CSYS overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Mold CSYS dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Using Mold CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Mold CSYS dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Mold CSYS in a family mold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Training staged assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Workpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Workpiece overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Define a user defined block workpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Specify a user defined body as a workpiece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Add a Workpiece Library insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Create pockets in mold plates and unite inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Add stock to mold plates and trim as cavity and core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Workpiece dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Workpiece library parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
User-defined workpiece bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Instruction format for initializing a training project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Cavity layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1


Cavity Layout overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Cavity Layout dialog box for rectangular, balanced layout . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Rectangular balanced layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Cavity Layout dialog box for rectangular, linear layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Rectangular linear layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Cavity Layout dialog box for circular layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Circular radial layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Circular constant layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Create a rectangular balanced layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Create a linear layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Create a circular layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Translate cavities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Rotate cavities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Transform cavities from point to point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Cavity Layout common options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Rectangular balanced layout options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Linear layout options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Contents

Circular layout options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27


Transform cavity options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Cavity pocket options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32

Family molds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Family Mold overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2


Create a family mold assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Change the active product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Remove a family product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Family Mold dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Unused Part Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Manage unused part files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Unused Part Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Mold tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Trim based parting process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2


Mold Tools overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Patching process overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Edge Patch overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Patch a loop of edges that spans multiple faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Edit Parting and Patch Surface overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Identify an existing surface as a patch sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Create Box overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Create Box dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Split Solid overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Split or Trim a solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Split Solid dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Solid Patch overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Solid Patch dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Trim Region Patch overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Use the Trim Region Patch command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Enlarge Surface Patch overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Create a patch sheet by enlarging a surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Create a patch sheet by enlarging a surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Enlarge Surface Patch dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Trim Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 5


Contents

Use the Trim Solid command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38


Trim Solid dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Replace Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Using the Replace Solid command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Replace Solid dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Extend Solid overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Extend a solid face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Extend Solid dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Reference Blend overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Create reference blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Reference Blend dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Merge Cavities overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Merge Cavities dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
Merge cavities into a single insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
Merge Cavities dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Design Inserts overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
Create a Design Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Design Inserts dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
Tooling Motion Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
Tooling Motion Simulation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72
Other commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
Parting Check overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
WAVE Control overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
Manufacturing Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
Manufacturing Geometry dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78
Static Interference Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
Calculate Area overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-82
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83

Partings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Molded Part Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Check Regions — Calculate tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Check Wall Thickness — Calculate tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Parting methods overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Trim-based parting process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Mold Wizard parting terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Parting components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Cavity and core parting trim results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Parting tools overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Parting Navigator overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Contents

Split Face overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33


Split faces by isocline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Split faces by datum plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Split Face dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Patch Surfaces overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Patch Surface/Edge Patch dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Edge Patch dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Patch Surfaces related topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Define Regions overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Create cavity and core regions and parting lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Define new regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
Define regions by seed and boundary faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Define Regions dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Search Regions dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Seed and boundary faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Design Parting Surface overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
Traverse Parting Lines overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Simple guide line creation and editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Auto Create Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
Create and edit guide lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63
Guide Line dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66
Design Parting Surface dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67
Design parting surfaces process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Create a surface at a transition object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Design Parting Surface dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71
Parting surface related topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
Define Cavity and Core overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78
Create tooling trimmed bodies one by one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Define Cavity and Core dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80
Suggestions to resolve parting problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-82
Swap Model overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83
Swap the product model for a new version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
Swap Settings dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
Model Compare overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87
Model Compare options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-92
Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
Back Up Parting/Patch Sheets overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-94
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-95

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 7


Contents

Mold Design Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1


Mold Design Validation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Mold Design Validation dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Mold Design Validation related topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
The molding part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Mold base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1


Mold Base Library overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Mold Base Design dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Add a mold base from a standard catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Configure an interchangeable mold base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Configure a universal mold base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Mold Base dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Standard Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1


Standard parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Standard Part Management dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Component sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Slide and Lifter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Slide and lifter configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Trim Mold Components overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Trim dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Trim a component with an existing trim sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Trim Mold Components dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Ejector Pin Post Processing overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Trim ejector pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Untrim pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Adjust pin lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Ejector Pin Post Processing dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
Ejector pin holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Opening large Mold Wizard assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30
Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32

Sub-insert Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1


Sub-insert Library overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Design a Sub-insert using the library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Contents

Gates and runners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1


Gates and runner systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Gate Library overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Runner overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Runner options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11

Mold Cooling Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1


Mold Cooling Tools overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Pattern Channel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Create pattern channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Cooling Fittings overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Position concept cooling fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Concept Design overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Cooling Standard Part Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Create cooling channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15

Electrode design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1


Electrode design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Simultaneous development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6

Creating pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1


Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Pocket dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Pocket design procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Pocket dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Pocket Threaded Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-8
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11

Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Mold Wizard drafting commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Drawing overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Assembly Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Create assembly drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
Component drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
Create component drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
Bill of Material overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9


Contents

Using the Bill of Material command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9


Bill of Material options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
Hole Table overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
Hole Table dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
Hole Table options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-16
Create a Hole Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-17
Update a hole table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-18
Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-19
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20

Additional projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1


Automotive Grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Battery case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Coffee filter housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Saw case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Mounting flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Axle frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Power tool casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Wagon bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9

Customizing Mold Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1


Mold Wizard Templates and Libraries overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Customizing Standard Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Standard part registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Interchangeable standard parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
Mold base control files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Mold base database spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

10 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Course overview

Course description
Mold Wizard is a collection of tools that assist you by automating common
mold design tasks.

Intended audience
The Mold Wizard Design Process course is targeted at NX users who are
responsible for injection mold design and development.

Prerequisites
You should have completed the following courses:
• Essentials for NX Designers

• Intermediate NX Design and Assemblies

We highly recommend, but do not require, that you have:


• Mold design experience

• Experience with NX assemblies, WAVE, direct modeling, and freeform


modeling

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 11


Course overview

Objectives
After successfully completing this course, you should be able to perform the
following activities:
• Create Mold Wizard product assemblies

• Apply a shrink factor

• Define core and cavity regions within a product model

• Create patch up (shut off) geometry

• Create mold tooling inserts

• Use mold base libraries to choose a standard mold base

• Use standard part libraries to select and position common parts,


including insert pockets, sub inserts, cooling channels, gates, runners,
and electrodes

• Create a bill of materials

• Begin a mold assembly drawing

12 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Course overview

Class standards for NX part files


The Mold Wizard Design Process course uses standards that are distinct
from other NX instructor-led courses.
Standards and defaults for using layers, naming parts, and automatic
creation of geometry will be explained during this course.

Tips for working with Mold Wizard


• Save your work frequently.

• Use Save All to be certain you do not lose any modifications to WAVE
linked parts in your project assembly.

• There is a 128 character limit on the size of a part file name, including the
four characters .prt.

• The Project Name defaults to 11 characters.

• You can use of a copy of the master part. As long as a replacement is copied
from the same original, updated file, assemblies continue to recognize it.

• When you reopen an Mold Wizard assembly, remember that the original
part is referenced by its Empty reference set. Certain functions, such as
Edge Patch and Mold CSYS, require the original product part to be open.

Set the role for this course


Step 1: Set the Advanced with Full Menus role.

On the Resource bar, click the Roles tab .

Expand the System Defaults area of the palette.

Choose Advanced with Full Menus .

Choose OK to acknowledge the warning message.

From time to time your instructor may suggest other toolbar buttons
to activate.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 13


Course overview

How to use this manual


The following guidelines describe how you can get the most benefit from
your use of the course guide.

Lesson format

The general format for lesson content is:


• Instructor presentation

• One or more activities

• Workbook project
Projects allow you to test your new skills without detailed instruction.
Consult your instructor for additional information.

• Summary

14 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
1
Lesson

1 Tutorial

Purpose
A quick overview of the Mold Wizard design process helps you put the detailed
instruction for each step of the process in context.

Objective
After you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Analyze a design.

• Create a mold assembly.

• Define inserts and a parting.

• Refine the design with standard parts, gates and runners.

Do the tutorial
1. Choose Help®NX Help®Tooling Design®Getting started with Mold
Design.

2. Complete the tutorial.

The tutorial should take about 90 minutes.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 1-1


1
Lesson

2 Initializing a mold design project


2

Purpose
This lesson describes several initial steps necessary to create mold design
projects.

Objective
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Set the options in the Initialize Project dialog box.

• Examine the material database.

• Describe the function of components in the Mold Wizard assembly


structure.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 2-1


Initializing a mold design project

Initialize Project overview


You can use the Initialize Project command to:
2 • Create a new mold design project.

• Add additional products to an existing project to create a family mold.

Creating a new project

When you create a new project, you can specify:


• A template assembly

• Units

• The path to the project part files

• The project name.

• Material and shrinkage factor

When you initialize a project, the solid product body becomes the parent of a
series of associatively linked bodies.
You can replace the product model file with a revised file and update the
mold assembly with minimal loss.

Family molds
You can use the Initialize Project command to add another product to an
open tooling assembly.
You can add as many products as you require in one injection mold.

Where do I find it?


Application Mold Wizard
Toolbar
Mold Wizard®Initialize Project

2-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Initializing a mold design project

Initialize Project dialog box

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 2-3


Initializing a mold design project

Using Initialize Project

Create a new tooling assembly

2 You do not need to have the product model open when you begin a mold
design project.

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Initialize Project .

2. In the Open Part File dialog box, navigate to and select the product model
for which you want to define a mold assembly.

3. If you are prompted to select the product body, select one of the two or
more bodies in the product model part file.

4. (Optional) In the Path box, type a path, or, click Browse .

5. (Optional) In the Name box, type a name for the project.

6. (Optional) From the Material list, select a defined material and shrinkage
factor.

7. (Optional) From the Configuration list, select a template assembly


structure.

8. (Optional) In the Shrinkage box, type the shrinkage factor.

9. (Optional) From the Configuration list, select a template assembly for


the project.

10. (Optional) In the Attributes group, assign attributes to the top level
assembly part.

11. (Optional) In the Initialize Project dialog box, in the Settings group, select
the project units.

12. (Optional) In the Settings group, select the Rename Components check
box to open the Part Name Management dialog box after you finish
specifying project parameters.
You can use the Part Name Management dialog box to verify or
change the default file names of the assembly component parts.

13. Click OK.

2-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Initializing a mold design project

After the template assembly is renamed, the parts are not saved to disk.
You can close the parts without saving them if you want to change the
settings.
2
Add a product to an assembly
When you load additional product models to a tooling assembly, the units,
project path, and project name remain the same and the Initialize Project
dialog box is not displayed.
1. Open an existing tooling assembly.

2. On the Mold Wizard tool bar, click Initialize Project .

3. In the Open Part File dialog box, navigate to and select the product model
that you want to add to the mold assembly.

4. Repeat this process until all of the family product models have been added.

To create additional instances of a product that is already in the mold


assembly, use the Cavity Layout command.

Open an existing project


1. Start the Mold Wizard application.

2. Choose File®Open.
If you find it more convenient, you can also click Initialize Project
at this step.

3. In the Open dialog box, select the *_top component of the project and
click OK.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 2-5


Initializing a mold design project

Initialize Project dialog box


Product
Selects a product body if there are multiple solid bodies in the original
2 product file.
Select Object

Project Settings
Path Lets you:
• Accept the path to the folder from which you selected the product
model or type a different path.

• Type a new path.

• Browse to a path.
Name Sets the project name.
Material Sets the shrinkage factor from a database of materials.
Shrinkage Sets the shrinkage.
Configuration Lets you select a template assembly.
Attributes
list Lets you select attributes to add to the *_top assembly part during
initialization.
Settings
Project Units Specifies the units of measure for the tool assembly files.
Rename When selected, opens the Part Name Management dialog box after you
Components click OK.
Opens the material database spreadsheet
.../moldwizard/templates/mw_material.xls (xs4).
Edit Material
Data Base
Opens the template assembly register spreadsheet
.../moldwizard/pre_part/prepart_config.xls (xs4).
Edit Project
Configuration
Opens the custom attributes spreadsheet
.../moldwizard/templates/custom_attr_template.xls (xs4).
Edit
Customized
Attributes

2-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Initializing a mold design project

Overwriting safeguard
If you specify any existing part name and a numeric suffix wild card character
in the name rule, the numeric suffix is incremented until a unique name
is found.
2
If you specify an existing project path and name with no numeric suffix wild
card, a dialog box is displayed with the following options:
• Overwrite the Project

• Load the Project

• Change the Project Name

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 2-7


Initializing a mold design project

Mold.V1 template
Use the Mold.V1 template when you want to:
• Use the recommended and default template.
2
• Use the parting-set structure, to be able to change the mold coordinate
system after you create the parting.

• Use a sketch-based, extruded workpiece.

• Use the combined subassembly for creating combined cavities, cores, or


workpieces.

• Create cores, cavities, and slide bodies that inherit the face colors and
translucency of defined regions.

• Initialize projects with one set of naming rules. The Part Name
Management dialog box appears only one time for assemblies made with
this template.

2-8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Initializing a mold design project

Mold.V1 Structure
Part name Identifying attribute
top UM_TOP
var UM_VAR 2
cool MW_COOL
cool_side_b MW_COOL_SIDE_A
cool_side_a MW_COOL_SIDE_B
fill UM_GR
misc UM_OTHER
misc_side_b MW_MISC_SIDE_A
misc_side_a MW_MISC_SIDE_B
layout UM_LAYOUT
combined MW_COMBINED
comb-wp MW_COMB_WP
comb-core MW_COMB_CORE
comb-cavity MW_COMB_CAVITY
product UM_PROD
workpiece MW_COMP_TYPE=MW_WORKPIECE
parting-set MW_COMP_TYPE=MW_PARTING_SET
original product
parting UM_SHRINKAGE
shrink UM_SHRINKAGE_KEEP
molding MW_MASTER
core UM_PART_CORE
cavity UM_PART_CAVITY
prod_side_a MW_PROD_SIDE_A
prod_side_b MW_PROD_SIDE_B
trim UM_TRIM_PART

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 2-9


Initializing a mold design project

Original template
Use the original template when you want to:
• Initialize projects with individual naming rules for each product that can
2 be different from the rules for the top level assembly.

• Use user defined box workpieces with sizes based on clearance and
automatic rounding, or on dimensions from a reference point.

Original structure
Part name Identifying attribute
top UM_TOP
var UM_VAR
cool MW_COOL
cool_side_b MW_COOL_SIDE_A
cool_side_a MW_COOL_SIDE_B
fill UM_GR
misc UM_OTHER
misc_side_b MW_MISC_SIDE_A
misc_side_a MW_MISC_SIDE_B
layout UM_LAYOUT
product UM_PROD
original product
shrink UM_SHRINKAGE_KEEP
parting UM_SHRINKAGE
core UM_PART_CORE
cavity UM_PART_CAVITY
trim UM_TRIM_PART
molding MW_MASTER
prod_side_a MW_PROD_SIDE_A
prod_side_b MW_PROD_SIDE_B

2-10 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Initializing a mold design project

ESI template
Use the ESI (early supplier involvement) template when you want to:
• Evaluate moldability by testing parting and patch commands.
2
• Review product model changes, for example by using the Model Compare
command.

• Test the Swap Model command in a small assembly with fast updates.

ESI structure Identifying Attributes


UM_TOP

ESI_top UM_LAYOUT
UM_PROD
ESI_Product
UM_SHRINKAGE_KEEP

ESI_Analysis UM_SHRINKAGE
MW_MASTER
original_product

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 2-11


Initializing a mold design project

Top level template parts

Mold.V1 and Original templates

2 top Organizes the assembly structure.


Contains the definition of a bill of materials .
var Contains expressions used by the mold base and standard
parts.
cool Organizes cooling bodies that cross two or more cavities.
Side A and side B components permit simultaneous
development of fixed and moving halves.
fill Contains solids for runners and gates.
misc Contains cavity independent standard parts such as
locating rings, parting locks, and sprue pins.
Side A and side B components permit simultaneous
development of fixed and moving halves.
layout Contains one or more product (*_prod) subassemblies.
combined Contains components for a combined workpiece, cavity,
and core.
Components contain linked geometry after the Merge
Cavities command is used.
comb-wp Contains sketch sketch (1) for a combined workpiece.
comb-cavity Contains the linked body for the combined cavity.
comb-core Contains the linked body for the combined core.

2-12 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Initializing a mold design project

Product template parts


prod Contains product-specific components for a single
instance of a product model.
Side A and side B components permit simultaneous 2
development of fixed and moving halves.
workpiece Contains a sketch and extruded workpiece body.
The shape and size of the sketch and extents of the
extrusion can be edited.
Used only in the Mold.V1 configuration template.
parting-set Contains shrink, molding, and parting component parts
that must be moved together when you use the Mold
CSYS command.
Used only in the Mold.V1 configuration template.
molding Contains a linked copy of the original product body.
Used to make corrections such as tapers and edge blends.
shrink Contains a linked copy of the molding body.
The initially broken link is re-linked to the product body
during initialization.
A scale feature applied to the linked body is updated
when you choose a material during initialization, or when
you edit the shrinkage.
parting Contains a linked copy of the molding body.
In the Mold.V1 template, contains linked copies of the
work piece the mold CSYS.
cavity Contains a linked cavity surface, initially a broken link.
Contains a linked copy of the workpiece.
Contains a trim feature, initially suppressed by
expression.
The link is connected and the trim unsuppressed by the
Create Cavity and Core command.
core Contains a linked core surface, initially a broken link.
Contains a linked copy of the workpiece.
Contains a trim feature, initially suppressed by
expression.
The link is connected and the trim unsuppressed by the
Create Cavity and Core command.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 2-13


Initializing a mold design project

trim Contains linked regions of the cavity and core.


Used by the Trim Mold Components and Ejector Pin
commands to trim electrodes, inserts, slide faces, ejector
pins, and so on.
2
Product model Contains the original part model for a molded plastic
part file product design. The model should be a valid solid body.
This body is the parent of the molding body.
If there is a part in the prod assembly template structure
with the attribute MW_PARTING_SET, for example the
Mold.V1 configuration template, the original product part
is added as a component of the *_parting-set file. If no
part has the MW_PARTING_SET, the original part is
added as a component of the *_prod file.
This part is represented by the Empty reference set.
Parts represented by the Empty reference set
are not loaded when you open an assembly.
This conserves memory and improves system
performance.

2-14 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Initializing a mold design project

ESI template parts


ESI_Analysis Contains a linked copy of the original product model.
The copy has a scale feature for shrinkage.
The body in this part is the target for parting commands.
2
ESI_Product Contains a linked body of the analysis part.
Product model Contains the original part model used as the parent of
part file the ESI_Analysis body.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 2-15


Initializing a mold design project

Part Name Management overview


You can use the Part Name Management system to configure component
part file names.
2 You can change names by:
• Applying a name rule.

• Typing names for individual parts.

• Mapping from template file names to your names.

You can set the default name rule in the customer defaults.

The Part Name Management system renames parts as they are added
to a project. Parts that have already been installed in an assembly
are not renamed.

Where do I find it?


Application
Prerequisite Ensure that the Rename Components check box is
selected.
Location in dialog File parameters and file commands sub window at the
box upper right corner of the dialog boxes for the select
commands.

2-16 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Initializing a mold design project

Part Name Management dialog box

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 2-17


Initializing a mold design project

Use the Part Name Management dialog box


Access the Part Name Management system

2 To display the Part Name Management dialog box, select the Rename
Components check box in the following dialog boxes:
• Initialize Project

• Standard Part Management

• Mold Base Management

• Workpiece Insert Design

• Slider/Lifter Design

• Sub-insert Library

• Cooling Component Design

• Electrode Design

Change the default state of the Rename Components check box


1. Choose File®Utilities®Customer Defaults.

2. From the list, select .

3. Under Mold Wizard, select General.

4. On the General page, click the Part Name Definition tab.

5. Scroll the window to see the Display Part Name Mapping Dialog Box
check box.

6. Select the Rename Components check box to make the Rename


Components check box selected by default, or clear it to make the
Rename Components check box cleared by default.

7. Restart NX to enable your changes.

Enter a custom name


1. From the Original Name column, select the component part to be renamed

2. In the Part Name column, click the selected name, type the new name in
the box, and press Enter.

2-18 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Initializing a mold design project

Set All Names


1. In the Next Part Name Number box, type the numeric suffix that you want
used first in your project.
2
2. Click Set All Names .

3. Review the pending part names in the Part Name column.

Set Selected Names


1. In the Next Part Name Number box, type the numeric suffix that you want
used first in your project.

2. Select one or more rows in the list.

3. Click Set Selected Names .

4. Review the pending part names in the Part Name column.


The name rule is applied to the selected template part. The number
in the Next Part Name Number box is used to replace question mark
characters (?) in the name rule.

Map template item types in Teamcenter Integration for NX


You can have custom item types for various models.
1. A Teamcenter administrator defines the custom item type and a name
rule. For example, the custom item could be MW, and the name rule could
be MW????.

2. In the map_template_name.txt file, add data in the third column for the
items to map to the custom type.
# Template_name Customized_name TCE_item_type
# Top Mold Assembly Names
top top MW
cool cool Item
misc

The default is Item. You can specify it explicitly, as shown in the second
line of the preceding example, or leave it out as shown in the third line.

When you create a new assembly, the customized item type and the name rule
for custom items appear in the Part Name Management dialog box.
Original Part
Part Name Clone Reference Item Type
Name Number
top MW0010 126645_top_MW0010 MW

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 2-19


Initializing a mold design project

Original Part
Part Name Clone Reference Item Type
Name Number
cool 126699 126645_cool_126699 Item
misc 126700 126645_misc_126700 Item
2

2-20 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Initializing a mold design project

Part Name Management dialog box


Name Rules
Name Rule Specifies the combination of characters and variables that are
combined to form the new part name. You can type a name rule in 2
the box.
You can define one or more default name rules in the customer
defaults. When there are multiple default name rules, you can
select a default name rule from a list.
Next Part Name Specifies the first digit to use in replacing the ? wild card character.
Number For subsequent files, the number is increased in increments of one
Part Names
Output Directory Specifies the folder where all renamed parts will be placed when
you save them.
Original Name Displays the names of template parts.
column
Part Name column Displays the currently assigned names.
You can alter one or more names in the Name column by:
• Clicking Set All Names.

• Clicking Set Selected Names.

• Clicking the cell in the Part Name column for a selected


part and typing a new name in the box that is opened.
Rename and Exactly one of the two options is always selected in each row.
Reference columns If you select Rename, the specified template part is renamed and
is saved in your project folder when you save the parent assembly.
If you select Reference, the template part is only referenced in your
assembly, and not copied. Changes to the template are reflected in
all assemblies that reference it the next time you open them.
Applies the file naming rule to all components listed in the Original
Name column.
Set All Names
Applies the file naming rule to all components selected in the
Original Name column.
Set Selected Names

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 2-21


Initializing a mold design project

Part Name Management related topics

Name conflict with existing files

2 If the name rule generates the name of an existing file in the project directory:
• If one or more question mark (?) characters are used in the name rule,
the number that replaces the question mark(s) is automatically increased
until there is no longer a name conflict.

• If there is no question mark in the name rule, you receive a name conflict
error message. You can resolve the error by specifying a new name, or by
removing the existing part if it is not in use.

Specifying a name rule


You can define the name rule in the customer defaults. The rule combines a
series of variables and characters to form new part names.
A sample file naming rule is:
<PROJECT_NAME>_<TEMPLATE_NAME>_????-A
The rules are interpreted as follows:
• All alphanumeric characters are used exactly as specified, except ?, <,
and >.

• Words contained between < and >, such as <PROJECT_NAME> are


variables.
There are two defined variables:
<PROJECT_NAME> — The project name entered in the Initialize
Project dialog box.
<PROJECT_NAME> — The name of the template file in the folder, a
base folder, or a standard part folder.

• The ? character is replaced by a digit. If the number has fewer digits than
there are ? characters, the leading ? characters are replaced by leading
zeros. If the number of digits exceeds the number of ? characters, the
extra digits are used as calculated, not discarded.

2-22 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Initializing a mold design project

Activity
In the Initializing a mold design project section, do the following activity:
• Setting project defaults
2

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 2-23


Initializing a mold design project

Summary
We discussed the initialization of a mold project.
In this lesson you:
2 • Specified initialization options for project name, units, and material.

• Reviewed the materials database spreadsheet.

• Reviewed the Mold Wizard assembly structure and the linking hierarchy
of key components.

2-24 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Lesson

3 Shrinkage

Purpose 3
A Scale feature in the *_shrink part is used to adjust the size of the mold
tooling for shrinkage.

Objective
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Explain the capabilities of the Scale command.

• Understand the advantages of using the Shrinkage command.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 3-1


Shrinkage

Shrinkage overview
Shrinkage is a scale factor applied to a product model to compensate for
part shrinkage while cooling. You can set or adjust the shrinkage value at
any point in the mold design process if you are using associative cavity and
core modeling practices.
The Shrinkage command updates a scale feature that is applied to the shrink
body.
3

Shrinkage VS Scale
Using the Shrinkage command in a Mold Wizard project has several unique
advantages which include:
• Enforcing that the shrinkage value is only applied to the part geometry
once.

• Consistently applying the shrinkage to the same Mold Wizard component


for each project.

• Easily checking the shrinkage value for the mold design project.
If shrinkage has not yet been applied, a value of 1.0 will be
displayed.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Shrinkage


Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Shrinkage

3-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Shrinkage

Scale Body dialog box

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 3-3


Shrinkage

Apply Shrinkage to a mold project


To apply shrinkage to the shrink part:

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Shrinkage .


The Scale Body dialog box is displayed.

2. In the Type group, from the list, select the type of shrinkage you want
to apply:
3
• Uniform
• Axisymmetric
• General

3. Specify the scaling parameters for the type you selected.


• For the Uniform method, in the Scale Point group, select a reference
point on the model.
The reference point remains stationary; all other points in the
model are scaled with reference to the selected point by the
specified scale factor.
The WCS origin is the default reference point.

• For the Axisymmetric method, in the Scale Axis group, specify the
vector direction of scaling on the model and select stationary a point
that lies on the vector.
The vector defines parallel planes throughout the model space
perpendicular to the vector. These planes are not moved along
the reference axis.
Points in every plane are transformed within the plane with
reference to the point where the stationary axis intersects the
plane by the specified scale factor.

• For the General method, in the Scale CSYS group, specify the
reference coordinate system.
The origin of the reference CSYS is stationary. All other points
in the model are transformed with respect to the origin by the
specified scale factor along each axis.

4. In the Scale Factor group, specify the scale along each available axis.

5. Click OK.

3-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Shrinkage

Summary
In this lesson you:
• Reviewed the scale command used for shrinkage factors.

• Explored the advantages of using the Shrinkage command.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 3-5


3
Lesson

4 Mold CSYS

Purpose
You can use the Mold CSYS command to orient a product correctly in a mold
base.

Objective
4
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Reposition a product component to the location and orientation in which
it is molded.

• Lock specific coordinate system axis during movements.

• Establish the basic mold parting plane.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 4-1


Mold CSYS

Mold CSYS overview


You can use the Mold CSYS command to reposition to the original product
component to the correct orientation and position relative to the mold
assembly.
The process of setting the mold CSYS includes the following:
1. Orienting the product model so that the ejection direction corresponds to
the Z-axis of the mold base.

2. Positioning the product model so that the principal parting plane lies on
the XY-plane of the mold base; that is, the plane where the fixed and
moving plates touch.

4 3. Positioning the product model on the X-Y plane of the mold base.

Assembly component positioning is used by Mold Wizard.

Product Model Orientation


In the following illustration, a part is shown as it was originally modelled
(1) and as it was oriented in the mold tooling assembly (2) by applying the
Mold CSYS command.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Mold CSYS


Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold CSYS

4-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold CSYS

Mold CSYS dialog box

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 4-3


Mold CSYS

Using Mold CSYS

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Mold CSYS .

2. Orient the WCS so the Z+ axis is in the direction of ejection.

3. Position the WCS origin at the intended principal parting plane.

4. Orient the WCS to align the X axis with the part as it will appear in the
cavity and core inserts.

5. (Optional) Position the product in the XY-plane of the mold base.

4-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold CSYS

Mold CSYS dialog box


Change Product Position
Current WCS Repositions the product component from the current WCS position
and orientation to the position and orientation of the mold base.
Product Body Center Repositions the product component from the center of the product
body to the mold base origin.
Center of Selected Faces Repositions the product component from the center of one or more
selected faces to the mold base origin.
Lock XYZ Position
Appears only when Product Body Center or Center of Selected Faces is selected.
Lock X Position When selected, prevents the X position of the product body from
changing.
Lock Y Position When selected, prevents the Y position of the product body from
changing. 4
Lock Z Position When selected, prevents the Z position of the product body from
changing.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 4-5


Mold CSYS

Mold CSYS in a family mold

Setting the Mold CSYS in a Family Mold


To make adjustments to the mold CSYS setting of a product model in a
family mold, you must first use the Family Mold command to select the active
product.

Position of family components in a family mold


When a family part is loaded, it uses the mold CSYS of the currently active
family part. For example, if you begin a Mold Wizard project and position
the first product model using the Mold CSYS command, the transformation
information is saved. If you add a second part to the project as a family
member, it is positioned with the previously saved transformation.
4

4-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold CSYS

Training staged assemblies


A training staged assembly is one in which all Mold Wizard construction
steps are complete up to the beginning of an activity, for example, mouse_top
in mouse_csys.
For following activities, many staged assemblies are provided.
To open a staged assembly:
1. Verify that no parts are open.

2. Verify that the Mold Wizard application is running.

3. Load the top level assembly in the indicated folder.

Always be certain that Mold Wizard is active before you open a mold
4
assembly. When you enter the Mold Wizard application important
assembly load options are set:
• All WAVE data is loaded.

• Partial loading is disabled.

The Mold Wizard software requires these file loading conditions to correctly
update your assembly.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 4-7


Mold CSYS

Activity
In the Mold CSYS section, do the following activity:
• Choosing and setting mold coordinate systems

4-8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold CSYS

Summary
In this lesson you:
• Set a mold coordinate system to the center of a product body

• Locked specific coordinate system axis during movements.

• Established the basic mold parting plane.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 4-9


4
Lesson

5 Workpiece

Purpose
A workpiece represents the mold core and cavity and a small amount of
surrounding mold steel. You can use the default workpiece directly as an
insert, specify your own insert, or apply the contours directly to mold plates.

Objective
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Understand and use the options when creating a Work Piece.

• Add a user defined workpiece to a project.


5
• Modify the work piece sketch parameters.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 5-1


Workpiece

Workpiece overview
Use the Workpiece command to create a workpiece that represents the mold
core and cavity and a small amount of surrounding mold steel. You can:
• Use the default user defined block as an insert.

• Specify your own insert body.

• Use a standard part as an insert.

• Apply core and cavity contours directly to mold plates.

• Modify previously defined core and cavity inserts.

The workpiece in the Mold.V1 template is translucent. To get the


benefit of this feature, in the Visualization Preferences dialog box, on
the Visual page, select the Translucency check box.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Work Piece


Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Work Piece

5-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Workpiece

Define a user defined block workpiece

Product Workpiece, Distance Allowance


This method is available with the Original initialization template
configuration.

1. In the Workpiece dialog box, in the Workpiece Method group, from the
Workpiece Method list, select User Defined Block.

2. In the Dimensions group, under Define Workpiece, from the Definition


Type list, select Distance Allowance.

3. (Optional) In the Dimensions group, under Define Workpiece, in the


Plus and Minus columns of the list, type the values you want to use as
minimum distance allowances.
To change a value in the list, first select the row, and then click the
cell. Change the value in the box.
The Length, Down, and Up columns show the total size of the
workpiece, including rounding if the Round Value option is selected.
5
4. (Optional) In the Length, Down, and Up columns, in the appropriate X, Y,
or Z row, type the actual sizes you want to use.

5. (Optional) Expand the Bitmap group as a reference to the values


represented by each column in the Size list.

6. (Optional) In the Settings group, select the Round Value check box, and
in the adjacent box, type the whole number and decimal places to which
you want to round the workpiece size.

7. (Optional) In the Settings group, select the Show Product Bounding


Box check box to review the relationship between the workpiece and the
product bounding box.

8. (Optional) In the Preview group, click Show Result or Undo Result to


show the currently defined workpiece or hide it.

9. Click OK or Apply.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 5-3


Workpiece

Product Workpiece, Reference Point


This method is available with the Original initialization template
configuration.

1. In the Workpiece dialog box, in the Workpiece Method group, from the
Workpiece Method list, select User Defined Block.

2. In the Workpiece Dimensions group, from the Definition Type list, select
Reference Point.

3. (Optional) Specify the reference point from which to dimension the


workpiece.
The WCS origin is the default reference point.

4. In the Workpiece Dimensions group, in the Size list, in the Plus and
Minus columns, type the distance values from the reference point.
The Total column shows the total size of the workpiece.
5
5. (Optional) Expand the Bitmap group as a reference to the values
represented by each column in the Size list.

6. (Optional) In the Settings group, select the Show Product Bounding


Box check box.

7. (Optional) In the Preview group, click Show Result or Undo Result to


show the currently defined workpiece or hide it.

8. Click OK or Apply.

5-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Workpiece

Product Workpiece, extrude sketch


This method is available with the Mold.V1 initialization template
configuration.

1. In the Workpiece dialog box, from the Type list, select Product Workpiece.

2. In the Workpiece group, from the Workpiece Method list, select User
Defined Block.

3. (Optional) In the Dimensions group, under Define Workpiece, click:

• Sketch Section to edit the existing sketch.

• Curve to select a different section string.

4. In the Dimensions group, under Limits, in the Start box, type the value in
the minus Z-axis at which to begin the extrusion.

5. In the End box, type the value in the plus Z-axis at which to end the 5
extrusion.

6. (Optional) In the Settings group, select the Show Product Bounding


Box check box.

7. (Optional) In the Preview group, select the Preview check box to display a
copy of the original workpiece at the current dimensions.

8. (Optional) In the Preview group, click Show Result or Undo Result to


show only the currently defined workpiece or hide it.

9. Click OK or Apply.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 5-5


Workpiece

Specify a user defined body as a workpiece


1. (Optional) In the Workpiece dialog box, from the Type list, select Product
Workpiece or Combined Workpiece.

2. In the Workpiece group, from the Workpiece Method list, select one of
the following methods to define a workpiece:
• Cavity-Core

• Cavity Only

• Core Only

3. Select a solid body that you created in the *_parting part.

4. (Optional) In the Settings group, select the Show Product Bounding


Box check box.

5. (Optional) In the Preview group, click Show Result or Undo Result to


5 show the currently defined workpiece or hide it.

6. Click OK or Apply.

5-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Workpiece

Add a Workpiece Library insert


1. (Optional) In the Workpiece dialog box, from the Type list, select Product
Workpiece or Combined Workpiece.

2. In the Workpiece group, from the Workpiece Method list, select one of
the following methods to define a workpiece:
• Cavity-Core

• Cavity Only

• Core Only

3. Click Workpiece Library to choose a standard insert from the library.

4. (Optional) In the Settings group, select the Show Product Bounding


Box check box.

5. (Optional) In the Preview group, click Show Result or Undo Result to


show the currently defined workpiece or hide it.
5
6. Click OK or Apply.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 5-7


Workpiece

Create pockets in mold plates and unite inserts


You can use mold base plates as the cavity, core, or both, instead of using
inserts.
You must use the Pocket command to perform the following procedure.

1. Model the cavity and core with the automatic work piece.
The workpiece cavity and core must not be thicker than the
corresponding mold plate.

2. Using the Subtract Material option in the Pocket dialog box, create
pockets in the mold base plates for the inserts.
You can use:

• The untrimmed insert parent body in the parting part.

5 • The insert pocket body, if you defined it.

• The combined workpiece body, if you defined it.

3. Display the cavity or core trimmed insert and the corresponding mold
plate.

4. Make the mold plate the work part.

5. In the Selection bar, from the Selection Scope list, select Entire
Assembly.

6. Using the Add Material option in the Pocket Design dialog box, unite the
linked insert to the mold base plate.

5-8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Workpiece

Add stock to mold plates and trim as cavity and core


You can use mold base plates as the cavity, core, or both, instead of using
inserts.
You must use methods in the Modeling application and the WAVE
Geometry Linker command to perform the following procedure.

1. Model the cavity and core with the automatic workpiece.


The workpiece must be at least as large in X and Y as the
corresponding mold plates.

2. (Optional) Associate the mold plate sizes to the workpiece dimensions:


• Link X and Y dimension parameters from the mold base in the parting
part.

• Change the formulas for the linked overall sizes to divide them by two.

• Using the reference point method with the default reference point, the
mold CSYS origin, type the appropriate new expression names in the 5
Plus and Minus boxes in the X and Y rows.

3. Offset or extrude the mold base plates to add stock needed to include
the cavity and core shape.
You can offset or extrude the parting face of the mold base plates
and correct the plate positions

4. Correct the position of the plates in the mold base by adjusting the offsets
in the Mold Base Management dialog box.

5. (Optional) Create interpart expressions to associate the offset or extrude


distance parameters to the face offset expressions in the Mold Base
Management dialog box.

6. Geometry link the plate bodies into the parting part.

7. Follow the Specify a user defined body as a workpiece procedure, selecting


the linked plate bodies as your cavity and core user bodies.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 5-9


Workpiece

Workpiece dialog box


Type
Product Workpiece Creates a workpiece for only the active product model.
Combined Workpiece Creates a workpiece for multiple instances of one product or for
two or more products.
Workpiece Block
User Defined Block Creates a block-shaped insert using one of the following
methods:
• Lets you specify material allowance around the product(s)
bounding box.

• Lets you specify workpiece dimensions measured from a


reference point.
Cavity-Core Let you select a body that you constructed in the parting part or
select and configure a workpiece from a predefined library.
Cavity Only
The body you identify is later trimmed to form the following
Core Only
insert:
5 Cavity Only Cavity
Core Only Core
Cavity-Core Both

5-10 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Workpiece

Workpiece Dimensions
Appears only when Automatic Block is selected.
Distance Allowance Lets you specify the amount of material between the product
bounding box and the adjacent surfaces of the workpiece.
Reference Point Lets you specify the distance between the reference point and
the corresponding faces of the workpiece.
Specify Point Lets you specify a reference point.
The default reference point is the origin of the mold
coordinate system.
Opens the Point dialog box.
Point Constructor
Lets you select a point type filter from the most common point
Specify Point list selection methods.
Bitmap
You can expand the Bitmap group to view a diagram showing the relationships between
the standard part bounding box, the parting plane, and the workpiece dimensions in the
list for the Distance Allowance option.
The view shows the XZ plane. Y-axis dimensions correspond to those shown for the
X-axis. 5

User Defined Body


Appears only when Cavity-Core, Cavity Only, or Core Only is selected.
Opens the Workpiece Insert Design dialog box.
Workpiece Library
Lets you select a body in the parting part as the
Select Workpiece Body workpiece.
Settings
Show Product Bounding Box Shows temporary geometry representing the smallest
block oriented to the mold coordinate system that
completely contains the product(s).
Preview
Displays or hides the calculated automatic block or user
Show Result, Undo Result defined workpiece body.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 5-11


Workpiece

Workpiece library parts


When you use a standard part as a workpiece, you can include pocket-cutting
bodies and attach subcomponents.
You can extend the library with your own parts, just as you can extend any
part library that you design to use the Standard Part Management system.
When you create your own standard parts, add the attribute
UM_WORKPIECE and set the attribute value to 1.
The workpiece register file is located in the ..../moldwizard/subinsert
directory.

A standard part with several variations of shape and size is provided. You
can set the following configuration and dimension options:

• Shape — Rectangle or round

• Foot — Off, along X and Y, along X, or along Y


5 • Corner — No radius, same radius, or individual radius

• Cavity_top — Dimension from parting to top of cavity

• Core_bottom — Dimension from parting to bottom of core

• Other Dimensions — X and Y length, foot offset and height

• Material — P20, H13, S7

CORE_BOTTOM
(1)
dimension
(2) CAVITY_TOP dimension

5-12 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Workpiece

User-defined workpiece bodies


Use a user-defined workpiece to replace the automatic workpiece when:
• You need an insert block that is not a standard rectangular block.

• You require core and cavity insert blocks of different sizes.

When you create a user-defined workpiece, you can:


• Model it in the parting part.

• Use a geometry-linked body. Select a body from another component in the


mold assembly to be automatically geometry-linked.

• Add a user-defined feature.

• Import a part.

• Import a standard part with a pocket cutting body.

• Link to the A or B plate, or both. 5

Plastic knob with different sized user-defined core and cavity inserts

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 5-13


Workpiece

Instruction format for initializing a training project


In preceding activities, initialization steps are explained in detail.
The initialization commands and basic subsequent commands for following
activities are condensed into short tables.
Default values are shown, and values you must change are highlighted.
Path names may vary. The first part of files path are abbreviated to "..."
You can interpret the table as design intent and choose appropriate commands
to create the assembly.
Step 1: Initialize a tray project:
First part ... / tray / mdp_tray
Units default (inch)
Project Name default (mdp_tray)
Material ABS
Configuration Default
Name Rule <PROJECT_NAME>_<TEMPLATE_NAME>_???
5 Next Number 01
Mold CSYS Specified later
Workpiece
Cavity Layout

Step 1: Initialize a mouse project:


First Part .../ mouse / mdp_mcu
Units Millimeter
Project Name default (mdp_tray)
Configuration Default
Material ABS
Name Rule <PROJECT_NAME>_<TEMPLATE_NAME>_???
Next Number 01
Mold CSYS Specified later
Workpiece Default
Cavity Layout Auto Center

5-14 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Workpiece

Activities
In the Workpiece section, do the following activities:
• Edit the workpiece sketch

• User defined workpiece

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 5-15


Workpiece

Summary
In this lesson you:
• Used the most common workpiece options.

• Created a user-defined workpiece and corresponding mold inserts.

• Modified the work piece sketch parameters.

5-16 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Lesson

6 Cavity layout

Purpose
In this lesson you will learn how to manage tooling assemblies for molds
containing two or more identical or related products.

Objective
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Arrange work piece inserts to create a custom mold layout.

• Create a rectangular or circular array of work piece inserts.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 6-1


Cavity layout

Cavity Layout overview


You can use the Cavity Layout command to:

• Add additional instances of an existing product.

• Remove any instance except the last remaining instance of a product.

• Position mold cavities with respect to the mold base and to each other.

• Add a pocket cutting body based on the total size of one or more user
defined block workpieces.

• Center the layout in the mold tooling assembly.

Design the workpiece before you adjust the cavity layout. The workpiece
is the reference object for cavity positioning.

You can create the following layout patterns:

• Rectangular balanced

• Rectangular linear
6
• Circular radial

• Circular constant

The Cavity Layout command does not change the parting plane or
Z-level of a product subassembly. To move the parting level, you can
edit the Mold CSYS.
When you use the Cavity Layout command, the size of the layout is
recorded in the tooling assembly. Later, when you add a mold base,
the smallest mold base index size that can accommodate the layout is
automatically made the default.
When you position a cavity in the mold assembly, you are repositioning
a product node and everything under it in the assembly tree structure.
The product nodes under the layout component are manipulated in
this process.

When you open the Cavity Layout dialog box, one cavity is highlighted as the
cavity being positioned. You can select another cavity, or multiple cavities to
position, or deselect cavities.

6-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Cavity layout

When you add a cavity, you are creating a new instance of the product
subassembly under the layout node.
top
...
layout
product (1)
product (1) (second instance)
product (2) (a different product)

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Cavity Layout


Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Cavity Layout

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 6-3


Cavity layout

Cavity Layout dialog box for rectangular, balanced layout

6-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Cavity layout

Rectangular balanced layouts

Two-cavity layouts

In a rectangular balanced layout, the first cavity is copied. The copy is:
• Translated from the position of the first cavity by the workpiece dimension
in the selected direction.

• Rotated 180 degrees about its center to balance the design.

When you begin a balanced layout, you must specify a direction. There are
several methods to specify a direction. In each of the following examples, one
of the available vector arrows shown in the following figure is selected.

If you select the X-axis vector arrow and specify a two-cavity balanced layout,
the result might look like the following figure.

If you select the Y-axis vector arrow and specify a two- cavity balanced layout,
the result might look like the following figure.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 6-5


Cavity layout

Four-cavity layouts
In a four-cavity balanced layout:
• The second cavity is translated in the specified first direction and rotated
180 degrees.

• The second direction is always 90 degrees counterclockwise from the


specified first direction.

• The first and second cavities are copied and the copies are translated by
the cavity dimension in the second direction.

When you select the X-axis direction, a balanced four cavity layout might
look like the following figure.

6
In the figure, the X-axis vector arrow (1) is the specified direction. The
second direction (2) is automatically 90 degrees counterclockwise from the
first direction.
In the figure the second direction happens to coincide with the positive
Y-axis, but this is only because the Y-axis is also always 90 degrees
counterclockwise from the X-axis.

6-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Cavity layout

Offsets
You can specify additional translation distances for the first and second
directions.
If you specify different offsets for the first direction (1) and second direction
(2), and specify the X-axis direction as the first direction, a balanced four
cavity layout might look like the following figure.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 6-7


Cavity layout

Cavity Layout dialog box for rectangular, linear layout

6-8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Cavity layout

Rectangular linear layouts


In a rectangular linear cavity layout, you can create an array of cavities in:
• The XC direction.

• The YC direction.

• Both the XC and YC directions.

You can specify the distance to translate as:


• The dimension of the workpiece block in X, Y, or both.

• A fixed distance in X, Y, or both.

If you specify to translate the copies by the size of the workpiece block, you
can specify an additional distance in each axis to provide clearance between
inserts.
The following example shows a linear array of two cavities in X and three
cavities in Y. The size of the block was used as the translation offset. A small
additional offset was specified in the X direction (1) and a larger additional
offset was specified in the Y direction (2).

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 6-9


Cavity layout

The following example shows a linear array of two cavities in X and one
cavity in Y.

The following example shows a linear array of two cavities in Y and one
cavity in X.

6-10 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Cavity layout

Cavity Layout dialog box for circular layout

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 6-11


Cavity layout

Circular radial layouts


In a circular radial layout the first cavity is both copied and translated. The
copies are rotated with respect to the center of the mold base.
In the following figures, each example starts with a single cavity at the
mold origin, as shown in the following figure. The part is circular, but the
orientation is clearly distinguished by a rectangular pad modeled on the
positive X-axis.

6-12 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Cavity layout

Positioning operations take place in the following order:


• The selected cavity is translated along the X-axis by a specified radial
distance (1) to an intermediate position relative to the origin of the mold
CSYS.

• The angular position of the original cavity is adjusted to a final position by


moving it through a specified start angle (2) measured counterclockwise
from the X-axis at the first intermediate position. The original cavity is not
rotated with respect to its original angular orientation in the mold base.

• Additional copies are rotated from the final position of the original cavity
6
at angular increments. The increments (3) are calculated as a specified
total angle divided by the total number of cavities. The center of rotation
is always the origin of the mold CSYS.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 6-13


Cavity layout

The specified radial distance (1) is –3.0, so the cavity is translated 3


inches along negative X.
The starting angle is 20 degrees, so the original cavity moved through
20 degrees counterclockwise from its original position on the negative
X-axis, but not rotated.
The additional cavities are each rotated by the angle increment
(3), which is 360 degrees divided by 5 total cavities, or 72 degrees
counterclockwise.

6-14 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Cavity layout

Circular constant layouts


A circular constant layout is similar to a radial layout, but the angular
orientation of both the original cavity and the copies is held constant.
Positioning operations take place in the following order:
• The selected cavity is translated along the X-axis by a specified radial
distance (1) to an intermediate position relative to the origin of the mold
CSYS.

• The angular position of the original cavity is adjusted to a final position by


moving it through a specified start angle (2) measured counterclockwise
from the X-axis at the first intermediate position. The original cavity is not
rotated with respect to its original angular orientation in the mold base.

• Additional copies are positioned at angular increments from the final


position of the original cavity, but not rotated. The increments (3) are
calculated as a specified total angle divided by the total number of
cavities. The center of rotation is always the origin of the mold CSYS.

Compare the preceding circular constant array with the following circular
radial array. Notice the various positions of the rectangular pad on the
circumference of the part.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 6-15


Cavity layout

The original cavity is translated a radial distance of 4 inches along X.


The starting angle is 20 degrees, so the cavity is further positioned 20
degrees counterclockwise from its intermediate position.
The additional copied cavities are spaced at 60 degree increments.
The angle that must be specified is 180 degrees, or three times 60
degrees.

6-16 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Cavity layout

Create a rectangular balanced layout

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Cavity Layout .


If there is only one cavity in the tooling assembly, it is selected
automatically.

2. If there are multiple cavities, in the Cavity Layout dialog box, in the
Product group, click Select Body and do the following:
• Select the cavities that you want to move or copy.

• Deselect any cavities that you do not want to move or copy.

3. In the Layout Type group, from the list, select Rectangular.

4. Select Balanced.

5. Click Specify Vector.

6. Using the vector direction arrows, the vector menu, or the Vector dialog
box, specify the direction to move a copy of the selected cavity or cavities.
If necessary, you can click Reverse Direction to reverse the vector.

7. In the Balanced Layout Settings group, from the Cavity Count list, select
6
2 or 4.

8. (Optional) If there are two cavities, in the Gap Distance box, enter a
distance between the two adjacent cavities.

9. (Optional) If there are four cavities, in the First Distance box, enter a
distance between cavities in the specified direction.

10. (Optional) If there are four cavities, in the Second Distance box, enter a
distance between cavities copied at 90 counterclockwise to the specified
direction.

11. In the Generate Layout group, click Start Layout .

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 6-17


Cavity layout

Create a linear layout

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Cavity Layout .

2. If there are multiple cavities, in the Cavity Layout dialog box, in the
Product group, click Select Body and do the following:
• Select the cavities that you want to move or copy.

• Deselect any cavities that you do not want to move or copy.

3. In the Layout Type group, from the list, select Rectangular.

4. In the Layout Type group, select Linear.

5. In the Linear Layout Settings group, from the X Move Reference list,
select Block or Move.

6. If the cavity count in X is greater than one, in the X Distance box, type
one of the following:
• If the X Move Reference is Block, an additional clearance distance
between workpiece blocks in the X direction. You can use zero.

• If the X Move Reference is set to Move, the actual distance to


translate copies in X.
6
The value in the X Distance box is ignored if the count of cavities
in X is one.

7. In the Y Cavity Count box, enter the total number of cavities in the Y
direction, including the cavity being copied.

8. From the Y Move Reference list, select Block or Move.

9. If the cavity count in Y is greater than one, in the Y Distance box, type
one of the following:
• If the Y Move Reference is Block, an additional clearance distance
between workpiece blocks in the X direction. You can use zero.

• If the Y Move Reference is Move, the actual distance to translate


copies in X.
The value in the Y Distance box is ignored if the count of cavities
in Y is one.

10. In the Generate Layout group, click Start Layout .

6-18 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Cavity layout

Create a circular layout

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Cavity Layout .

2. If there are multiple cavities, in the Cavity Layout dialog box, in the
Product group, click Select Body and:
• Select the cavities that you want to move or copy.

• Deselect any cavities that you do not want to move or copy.

3. In the Layout Type group, from the list, select Circular.

4. In the Layout Type group, select Radial or Constant.


In a radial layout, all cavities except the original are rotated to their
final positions.
In a constant layout, all cavities are transformed to positions along
an arc with no rotation.

5. Click Specify Point.

6. Indicate a point on the cavity to be transformed to an intermediate


position on the X-axis.
The point you indicate is going to be positioned on the X-axis at a 6
distance from the origin specified in the Radius box.

7. In the Circular Layout Settings group, in the Cavity Count box, specify
the total number of cavities, including the original cavity.

8. In the Start Angle box, type the angle to which you want the original
cavity moved on the radius to its final position.
If you specify a start angle of zero degrees, the original cavity
remains at the first intermediate position on the X-axis.
Positive values are measured counterclockwise.
The cavity is translated in X and Y to the specified angular position
on the radius from the intermediate position. The original cavity is
not rotated in this transformation.

9. In the Rotate Angle box, enter the total angle for the array.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 6-19


Cavity layout

The total angle is used to calculate the incremental angle between


instances.
The incremental angle is the total angle divided by the total number
of instances.
In 360 degree arrays, this results in even spacing, because the last
instance is placed exactly one increment before the original.

If you want instances to span a total angle less than 360 degrees,
you must specify a larger total angle that is n times the desired
incremental angle between instances.

10. In the Radius box, type the distance from the origin along the X-axis to
place the point on the cavity that you indicated earlier. Negative values
are permitted.

11. In the Generate Layout group, click Start Layout .

6-20 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Cavity layout

Translate cavities

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Cavity Layout .

2. In the Cavity Layout dialog box, in the Edit Layout group, click Transform

3. In the Transform dialog box, in the Transformation Type group, from the
list, select Translate.
If you previously selected Show Shortcuts from the list, you need
only click Translate .

4. In the Cavities group, if necessary, click Select Body and select the cavity
or cavities you want to transform.
One cavity is selected by default when you open the Transform
dialog box.

5. In the Translate group, specify the X and Y distances to move or copy the
selected cavities. You can:
• Enter values in the X distance and Y distance boxes.

• Move the sliders to dynamically adjust the preview. 6


6. (Optional) In the Result group, click Move Original to move the selected
cavity or cavities instead of copying them.
In the customer defaults for Mold Wizard, in the dialog box for
Others, on the Layout page, in the Translation Method group, you
can change the default from Copy to Move.

7. Click OK.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 6-21


Cavity layout

Rotate cavities

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Cavity Layout .

2. In the Cavity Layout dialog box, in the Edit Layout group, click Transform

3. In the Transform dialog box, in the Transformation Type group, from


the list, select Rotate.
If you previously selected Show Shortcuts from the list, you need
only click Rotate .

4. In the Cavities group, if necessary, click Select Body and select the cavity
or cavities you want to transform.
One cavity is selected by default when you open the Transform
dialog box.

5. In the Rotate group, click Specify Pivot Point and indicate the point about
which to rotate the selected cavity or cavities.

6. In the Rotate group, specify the angle through which to move or copy the
selected cavities. You can:
6
• Enter a value in the Angle box.

• Move the slider to dynamically adjust the preview.

7. (Optional) In the Result group, click Move Original to move the selected
cavity or cavities instead of copying them.
In the customer defaults for Mold Wizard, in the dialog box for
Others, on the Layout page, in the Rotation Method group, you can
change the default from Copy to Move.

8. Click OK.

6-22 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Cavity layout

Transform cavities from point to point

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Cavity Layout .

2. In the Cavity Layout dialog box, in the Edit Layout group, click Transform

3. In the Transform dialog box, in the Transformation Type group, from the
list, select Point to Point.
If you previously selected Show Shortcuts from the list, you need
only click Point to Point .

4. In the Cavities group, if necessary, click Select Body and select the cavity
or cavities you want to transform.
One cavity is selected by default when you open the Transform
dialog box.

5. In the Point to Point group, click Specify From Point and indicate the
point from which to begin a translation vector.
The selected cavities are transformed from their current positions
by the vector (distance and direction) between the two points you
indicate. 6
6. Click Specify To Point and indicate the point at which to end a translation
vector.

7. (Optional) In the Result group, click Move Original to move the selected
cavity or cavities instead of copying them.
In the customer defaults for Mold Wizard, in the dialog box for
Others, on the Layout page, in the Rotation Method group, you can
change the default from Copy to Move.

8. Click OK.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 6-23


Cavity layout

Cavity Layout common options


Product
Select Body Lets you select one or more cavities to position.
Layout Type
list Rectangular — Creates layouts on an X and Y grid.
Circular — Creates layouts at a distance from the mold base
center and incremental angles from the X-axis.
Circular arrays are always centered at the center of
the mold base.
Balanced Appears only when Rectangular is selected.
For more information, refer to Rectangular balanced layout
options.
Linear Appears only when Rectangular is selected.
For more information, refer to Linear layout options.
Radial Appears only when Circular is selected.
For more information, refer to Circular layout options.
Constant Appears only when Circular is selected.
For more information, refer to Circular layout options.
Generate Layout
Creates the specified cavity layout.
6
Start Layout
Edit Layout
Opens the Insert Pocket dialog box.

Edit Insert Pocket


Opens the Transform dialog box.

Transform
Removes the selected instance(s).
To remove the last remaining instance of a product, you
Remove can use the Family Mold command.
Centers the defined layout at the center of the mold base.

Auto Center

6-24 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Cavity layout

Rectangular balanced layout options


Layout Type
Specify Vector Appears only when Balanced is selected.
Lets you specify the direction to copy, translate, and rotate the
cavity for a two-cavity layout, or the first direction for a four-cavity
layout. You can:
• Click the temporary X or Y vector arrows in the graphics
window.

• Choose an option from the vector options list.

• Click Vector Constructor to open the Vector dialog box.


Appears only when:
• Balanced is selected.
Reverse Direction
• A vector is specified.

Reverses the specified vector.


Balanced Layout Settings
Appears only when Balanced is selected.
Cavity Count Specifies a two cavity or four cavity balanced layout.
Gap Distance Appears only for two-cavity balanced layouts.
6
Specifies an additional clearance distance in the specified
direction between the two workpiece bodies.
First Distance Appears only for four-cavity balanced layouts.
Specifies an additional clearance distance in the specified
direction between the first two workpiece bodies.
Second Distance Appears only for four-cavity balanced layouts.
Specifies an additional clearance distance in the calculated second
direction between the first two workpiece bodies and the second
two workpiece bodies.
The second direction is always 90 degrees counterclockwise
from the specified direction.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 6-25


Cavity layout

Linear layout options


Linear Layout Settings
Appears only when Linear is selected.
X Cavity Count Specifies the total number of cavities in the X direction.
X Move Reference Block — Moves the cavities in the X direction by the X
dimension of the workpiece body, plus any amount in the X
Distance box.
Move — Moves the cavity by the distance specified in the X
Distance box.
X Distance Specifies either:
• The optional extra clearance distance between cavities in
the X direction for the when Block is selected as the X
Move Reference.

• The actual distance to move the cavities in the X direction


when Move is selected as the X Move Reference.
Y Cavity Count Specifies the total number of cavities in the Y direction.
Y Move Reference Block — Moves the cavities in the Y direction by the Y
dimension of the workpiece body, plus any amount in the Y
Distance box.
Move — Moves the cavity by the distance specified in the Y
Distance box.
6 Y Distance Specifies either:
• The optional extra clearance distance between cavities in
the Y direction for the when Block is selected as the Y
Move Reference.

• The actual distance to move the cavities in the Y direction


when Move is selected as the Y Move Reference.

6-26 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Cavity layout

Circular layout options


Layout Type
Specify Point Appears only when Circular is selected.
Lets you indicate a point in the cavity that will be moved to an
intermediate position on the X-axis at the distance from the
origin specified in the Radius box, and which will lie on the
arc of the radius for each additional cavity.
Circular Layout Settings
Appears only when Circular is selected.
Cavity Count Specifies the total number of cavities, including the original
cavity.
Start Angle Specifies an angular position on the radius to which the
original cavity will be translated before the remaining
positions are calculated.
Rotate Angle Specifies the number of cavities multiplied by the incremental
angle between instances.
If you use a smaller angle than the default 360 degrees
you need to calculate the value you place here. Multiply
the desired incremental angle between cavities by the
total number of instances.
Radius Specifies the radius – centered in the mold base of the arc – on
which the specified point in each instance is placed.
6

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 6-27


Cavity layout

Transform cavity options


Cavities
Select Body Lets you select one or more cavities to transform.
Transformation Type
list Lets you select from:

• Rotate

• Translate

• Point to Point

• Show Shortcuts
Rotates the selected cavities about a specified point.

Rotate
Translates the selected cavities a specified distance in X and Y.

Translate
Moves the selected cavities along a vector specified by a from
point and a to point.
Point to Point
Lets you select from:
6
Show all Options • Rotate

• Translate

• Point to Point

• Hide Shortcuts

6-28 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Cavity layout

Rotate
Appears only when Rotate is selected.
Specify Pivot Point Specifies the point about which the selected cavities are rotated.
Angle Specifies the angle of rotation. 1
Translate
Appears only when Translate is selected.
X distance Specifies the translation distance in X. 1
Y distance Specifies the translation distance in Y.
Point to Point
Appears only when Point to Point is selected.
Specify From Point Lets you indicate the start point of the translation vector. 1
Specify To Point Lets you indicate the end point of the translation vector.
Result
Move Original When selected, moves the selected cavities by the specified
transformation.
Copy Original When selected, copies the selected cavities to a location at the
specified transformation.
Preview
Preview When selected, shows a preview of the result of the
transformation.

1. You can enter a value in the box or move the slider.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 6-29


Cavity layout

Cavity pocket options


The Insert Pocket dialog box allows you to specify a member of a library
of inserts. The library and interface is organized by the Standard Part
Management System.

Catalog page
R Specifies the corner radius for the insert.
The radius values in the supplied library are:
• Inches: 0, 1/8, ¼, ½

• Millimeters: 0, 5, 10, 15
type Specifies the form of the corner radius.

6-30 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Cavity layout

Activity
In the Cavity layout section, do the following activity:
• Circular layout

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 6-31


Cavity layout

Summary
In this lesson you:
• Used the Cavity Layout command to arrange work piece inserts in a
circular array.

• Repositioned work piece inserts in a mold design layout.

6-32 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Lesson

7 Family molds

Purpose
In this lesson you will learn how to manage tooling assemblies for molds
containing two or more identical or related products.

Objective
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Create a family mold by initializing a new product model into an existing
mold assembly.

• Specify a new active member product of a family mold as the target for
Mold Wizard operations.

• Arrange work piece inserts for a mold cavity layout.

• Review the Unused Part Management command.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 7-1


Family molds

Family Mold overview


Molds that produce multiple parts of different designs, for example the top
and bottom cases of a phone, are referred to as family molds.
You can use the Family Mold command to:
• Change the active product.

• Remove any except the only product remaining from the assembly.

7-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Family molds

Assembly structure

When you load multiple product models, each product subassembly is placed
in the layout subassembly.

top
...
layout
product (1)
product (1) (second instance)
product (2) (a different product)

7
Position and orientation of family components

You can use the Mold CSYS command to:


• Orient a product so that the positive Z-axis is the draw direction (the
direction in which the product is removed from the mold).

• Position the principal parting plane on the XY plane of the mold


coordinate system.

You can use the Cavity Layout command to:


• Position product cavities in the mold.

• Create new instances of any existing product in the assembly.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 7-3


Family molds

Active product
You can use the Family Mold command to select an active product.
Part-specific operations affect only the active product and its related files.
In general, any command that changes a member of the product subassembly
is a product-specific command.
Product-specific commands include:
• Shrinkage

• Mold CSYS

• All parting commands

• All patch up commands

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Family Mold


Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Family Mold

7-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Family molds

Create a family mold assembly


1. Open the tooling assembly to which you want to add another product.

2. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Initialize Project .

3. For each additional product, repeat the preceding step until you have
added all of the family members.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 7-5


Family molds

Change the active product

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Family Mold .

2. In the Family Mold dialog box, in the Product group, from the list, select
the family member on which you wish to use product specific commands.

3. Click OK.

7-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Family molds

Remove a family product

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Family Mold .

2. In the Family Mold dialog box, in the Product group, from the list, select
the family member which you wish to remove.

3. Click Remove .

4. Click OK or Apply or Cancel.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 7-7


Family molds

Family Mold dialog box


Product
list Lets you select a member product in the family mold.
Deletes the selected product from the assembly.
Does not remove the file from the assembly folder.
Remove

7-8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Family molds

Unused Part Management


Use the Unused Part Management command to remove part files from the
project directory or move them into the recycle bin.
You can use this command only if the following conditions are true:
• The files are closed.

• The files are not components in the current assembly.

Where do I find it?


Application Mold Wizard
Toolbar
Mold Wizard®
Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Unused Part
Management

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 7-9


Family molds

Manage unused part files


Remove files

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Unused Part Management .

2. In the Unused Part Management dialog box, under Unused Part Location,
click Project Directory.
The list box shows the unused files in the project directory.

3. In the list box, select the files to remove.


To select all files in the list box, click the Select All check box.

4. Remove the files.


• To remove files and preserve the option to restore them later, click Put

File In Recycle Bin .

• To remove files permanently, click Delete File From Project Directory

Restore files

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Unused Part Management .

2. In the Unused Part Management dialog box, under Unused Part Location,
click Recycle Bin.
7 The list box shows the contents of the recycle bin.

3. In the list box, select the files to restore.


To select all files in the list box, click the Select All check box.

4. Click Restore From Recycle Bin .

Empty the recycle bin

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Unused Part Management .

2. In the Unused Part Management dialog box, under Unused Part Location,
click Recycle Bin.
The list box shows the contents of the recycle bin.

7-10 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Family molds

3. Click Empty Recycle Bin .

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 7-11


Family molds

Unused Part Management dialog box


Unused Part Management
Unused Part Location Lets you specify the contents of the
list box.
When Unused Part Location is set to
Project Directory, you can delete part
files from the directory or put the files
in the recycle bin.
When Unused Part Location is set to
Recycle Bin, you can restore the files
or empty the recycle bin.
Select All Selects all parts in the unused parts
list box.
If you clear the Select All check box,
you can select the files you want from
the list box.
Settings
List Suppressed Part Controls whether unused suppressed
parts are included in the list box.
List Closed Part Controls whether unused closed parts
are included in the list box.

7-12 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Family molds

Activity
In the Family molds section, do the following activity:
• Family mold project — toy shapes

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 7-13


Family molds

Project
In the Projects section, do the project:
• Family and layout

7-14 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Family molds

Summary
Mold Wizard has commands to create and configure family and multiple
cavity molds.
When you have multiple products, only one is the active product, or, the target
for various Mold Wizard commands.
When you have multiple instances of one product, remember to use the
Cavity Layout command rather than the Initialize Project command to create
additional instances.
In this lesson you:
• Created a family mold by initializing a new product model into an existing
mold assembly.

• Specified a new active member product of a family mold as the target


for Mold Wizard operations.

• Arranged work piece inserts for a mold cavity layout.

• Reviewed the Unused Part Management command.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 7-15


7
Lesson

8 Mold tools

Purpose
There are several methods to prepare a product for cavity and core definition.

Objective
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Understand and use sheet patch functions to define shut off geometry.

• Use the Create Box command to create a patch solid.

• Use the solid split function to associatively trim geometry.

• Understand the Trim Solid, Replace Solid, Extend Solid, and Reference
Blend tools.

• Create a single work piece for multiple cavity impressions.

• Design a sub-insert.

• Simulate a completed mold design.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-1


Mold tools

Trim based parting process


1. Create a set of sheets and parting lines from the cavity and core regions
of the product body.

2. Create patch sheets to fill interior openings inside the main parting line
loop.

3. Create one or more parting sheets, depending on the configuration of


parting lines.

4. Duplicate the parting sheet and patch faces for cavity and core.

5. Sew the completed parting sheets to the cavity and core regions,
respectively.

6. The sewn sets serve as trim sheets for the cavity and core blocks.

The trim based parting method applies to both solid models and surface
models.

8-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Mold Tools overview


You can use the commands on the Mold Tools toolbar to:
• Create solid and surface patches.

• Split solid bodies to make sub-inserts or slide heads.

• Enlarge surfaces for shut-off or parting faces.

• Split faces that cross a parting.

• Delete sets of parting sheets or patch sheets.

• Use the Parting Check or WAVE Control commands.

• Identify geometry for several manufacturing methods.

• Check for interference.

• Define stock size for parts to appear in a bill of materials.

• Merge inserts for multiple instances or different parts into one insert.

• Create sub-insert heads and components from existing solids.

• Create new blends that are associative to an existing blend face.

• Calculate the projected area of a body.

• Simulate mold motion.

If you are familiar with the Menuscript syntax, you can


customize the Mold Tools toolbar by editing the file
...\moldwizard\application\ug_moldwizard_tools.tbr. You can add
your custom NX Open programs or NX commands to the toolbar. 8
You can change several default settings that apply to commands on the
Mold Tools toolbar. See the online Help.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-3


Mold tools

Patching process overview


If you have a product model with internal openings, you must design a
shut-offs, patch sheets or patch bodies, to fill the openings. This is necessary
to create a trim sheet to form the major elements of the core and cavity bodies.
There are two patching processes to design shut-offs:
• Sheet patches:
o Patch Surfaces or Edge Patch

o Enlarge Surface Patch

o Trim Region Patch

• Solid patches:
o Patch Body

o Trim Solid

8-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Edge Patch overview


You can use the Edge Patch command to patch up an open area within a
closed loop of edges or curves.
After you select a closed loop, you can select or deselect highlighted faces
candidate faces that will be used to define the patch. The patch sheet created
can be one of the following types:

• Bounded Plane — Created when all curves or edges of the loop lie on
the same plane.

• Surface Patch — If the loop lies entirely on one face, the surface copy
and trim algorithm is used.

• Enlarge Surface — If the loop crosses two faces, a smart line is created
between two faces and the Enlarge Surface command is used create two
sheets. The software trims and sews the two patch surfaces.

• Mesh surface — If the none of the preceding algorithms apply, the


surrounding geometry is analyzed and a mesh surface is created within
the loop.

The patch surfaces are copied to CAVITY_SURFACE layer 28 and


CORE_SURFACE layer 27.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Edge Patch


Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Menu Tools®Edge Patch

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-5


Mold tools

Patch a loop of edges that spans multiple faces


The part for this example contains:

• A loop that lies on a single face, and is already patched.

• A loop that spans 4 faces on one side of the loop, and 2 faces on the other
side of the loop.

In this example the two faces are going to be used as reference faces.
Reference faces are:

• Enlarged to fill the opening.

• Trimmed to the edges of the opening.

• Sewn to form a single patch sheet.

1. Do one of the following:

• On the Mold Parting Tools toolbar, click Patch Surfaces .

• On the Mold Tools toolbar, click Edge Patch .

8-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

The Edge Patch dialog box opens, and if only one solid body is available, it
is selected and all closed edge loops that are not patched are identified
in the list in the Loop List group.

If the loop you want to patch is not identified, set the Type to Traverse
, and refer to procedures for patching surfaces.

2. In the Edge Patch dialog box, in the Loop Selection group, click Select
Reference Face.
Reference faces that are automatically inferred by the software are
highlighted.
If there are multiple possibilities, you may want to change the reference
faces. In this example, there are two possible sets of reference faces.
8

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-7


Mold tools

3. When the reference faces that match your intended patch design are
highlighted, click OK.
The contours and numbers of patch faces depend on the selected reference
faces.

8-8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-9


Mold tools

Edit Parting and Patch Surface overview


Use the Edit Parting and Patch Surface command to identify or delete
parting or patch sheets. This command creates or removes all of the members
of a patch set or linked parting sheets. You have the option to retain the
original sheet body.
Parting features are suppressed if you delete a parting or patch surface
after you create the core or cavity.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard


Mold Wizard®Mold Parting Tools®Edit Parting and

Patch Surface
Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Edit Parting and Patch

Toolbar Surface
Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Tools®Edit Parting and Patch Surface
Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Parting
Menu Tools®Edit Parting and Patch Surface

8-10 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Identify an existing surface as a patch sheet


1. Create one or more sheets using modeling methods in the parting part.
In the example, the gray sheet was created by modeling methods.

2. On the Mold Parting Tools toolbar, click Edit Parting and Patch Surface

.
All existing parting and patch sheets are highlighted.

3. Select the sheets you created.


8

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-11


Mold tools

4. (Optional) Specify a color for the sheets you selected.

5. Click OK.
The original sheet is moved to the patch surface layer as defined in your
customer defaults. The patch sheets are displayed. The patch sheets
are the specified color.

8-12 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Copies for the core and cavity are created in the core and cavity layers,
respectively. You can see the patch set in the Part Navigator.

Feature Group (91) “patch_set7”


Ruled (88)
Extracted Body (89) “LINKED_CORE_PATCH_SURF”
Extracted Body (90) “LINKED_CAVITY_PATCH_SURF”

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-13


Mold tools

Activity
In the Mold tools section, do the following activity:
• Edge patch and edit patch surface

8-14 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Create Box overview


Use the Create Box command to quickly create bounding boxes by selecting
adjacent faces on a solid. In the Tooling discipline, bounding boxes are used
to isolate special areas on a model.

Where do I find it?


Application Mold Wizard
Toolbar
Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Create Box
Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Tools®Create Box

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-15


Mold tools

Create Box dialog box


Option Description
Type Lets you specify the type of bounding box to
create:
Bounding Box
An associative box enclosing selected faces
and aligned with the WCS
General Box
A box that is centered at a selected point
and oriented to the WCS
Select Object Available when you set Type to Bounding Box.
Lets you select one or more faces to define the
box.
Clearance Available when you set Type to Bounding Box.
Specifies the amount to extend the box in all
directions beyond the minimum bounding box
of the selected faces.
Dimensions Appear when you set Type to General box and
select a point that specifies the center of the
box.
Each of the X Length, Y Length, and Z Length
options are associated with a WCS axis and
specify the box dimension along that axis.
Reference CSYS Available when you set Type to Bounding Box.
Specifies the Orientation of the box using the
Dynamic WCS handles.

8-16 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Split Solid overview


You can use the Split Solid command to:
• Break out a section of a cavity or core for an insert or slide.

• Trim a patch body to surrounding faces.

In the first figure, the gray solid is target body and the magenta solid (1)
is the tool body.
In the second figure, after the Split Solid command was used, the magenta
body (2) is separate from the target.

Where do I find it?


Application Mold Wizard
Toolbar
Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Split Solid
Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Tools®Split Solid 8

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-17


Mold tools

Split or Trim a solid

1. On the Mold Tools toolbar, click Split Solid .

2. In the Split Solid dialog box, in the Type group, from the list or the

shortcuts, select Split or Trim .


If you select a solid body as the tool, it does not matter whether Trim
or Split is selected; the result is the same.

3. Select a target body.


You can select a solid body or a sheet body as a target body.

4. In the Tool group, from the list, select one of the following:
• Existing Object

• New Plane

5. Select a tool object or specify a plane.

6. (Optional) If you are trimming a body to a sheet or plane, if necessary,


reverse the trim direction.

7. Click OK or Apply.

8-18 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Split Solid dialog box


Type
If you select a solid body as the tool, it does not matter whether you select
Trim or Split as the Type; the result is the same.
Splits the target body into two or
more pieces and keeps all pieces.
Split
Trims the target body with the
selected tool.
Trim
Tool

Tool Option Existing Object


Lets you select a plane, face, sheet
body, or solid body.
New Plane
Lets you specify a standard plane or
define a new plane.
Enlarge Face Available when you select a
non-planar sheet or face as a tool.
Lets you enlarge the tool until it can
be used to divide the target body.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-19


Mold tools

Solid Patch overview


Use the Solid Patch command to:
• Unite one or more solid bodies to the parting part model to close off open
areas.

• Link the selected solids to one or more destination parts.

Use Solid Patch when:


• You can save time or memory requirements by using a single solid patch
instead of multiple sheet patches.

• You require a solid body in the cavity or core part for a slide head.

Before you can use the Solid Patch command, you must model a patch
solid in the *_parting part to fit the opening.
The faces of the solid should be at the correct angles for shut-off faces.

Where do I find it?


Application Mold Wizard
Toolbar
Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Solid Patch
Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Tools®Solid Patch

8-20 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Solid Patch dialog box


Patch
Type Sets the action for the command.

Solid Patch
Defines a new solid patch feature.

Link Body
Lets you link existing solid patch
features.
When there is only one product body,
identified by the attribute UM_PROD
= 1, the body is selected automatically.
Select Product Body
Lets you select a product body as the
target body to be united with selected
patch bodies.
Lets you select one or more bodies to
be united with the selected product
body.
Select Patch Body
Destination Components

list Shows every component in the


current assembly that has an
attribute listed in the list on
the Patch_Link_list tab of the
...\moldwizard\templates\mw_attribute.xls
spreadsheet.
Settings

Edit Attribute Definition Opens


...\moldwizard\templates\mw_attribute.xls
(xla) in your spreadsheet application.
Subtract Tool Body When selected 8
Result

Opens the Information window and


displays information about the results
of the last patch block operation.
Show Patch and Link Information

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-21


Mold tools

Tips
When you use the Create Box command:
• Select only enough faces to define the volume you want.

• Select all faces for which you want associative updates.

• When you select faces, remember that the resulting block is aligned
with the WCS.

• Use the Clearance setting to create as much extra volume as you


require.

The output of the Create Box command is a Knowledge Fusion object


(KF object) and a sweep feature. The KF object and sweep combination
gives you full associativity between the patch block and the selected
faces.
Split Solid trim sheets are created in the layer named HiddenObject.

The layer and name for the hidden object layer are set in the mold defaults.
Do not make the hidden object layer visible or selectable except when
you need to modify hidden geometry.

For each tool solid selected for Solid Patch:


• The body is moved into the PatchBody layer (25).

• An Extract Body feature is created.

• The extracted body is united to the target solid.

When the product model changes, trim sheets, extracted bodies, and
parting body are all updated.

8 As the tool designer, to must choose use an appropriate Boolean


operation to compensate for geometry removed from the product model
by Solid Patch.
A WAVE linked body for each tool solid is placed in the PatchBody layer
in both core and cavity parts. This automatic linking makes it easy for
you to compensate for the material volume associatively. Typically, you
unite a copy to the tooling body in your choice of the core or cavity part.

8-22 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Activity
In the Mold tools section, do the following activity:
• Solid Patch and Boolean operations

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-23


Mold tools

Trim Region Patch overview


Use the Trim Region Patch command to patch an opening with a patch sheet
that has several faces.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Trim Region Patch


Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Menu Tools®Trim Region Patch

8-24 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Use the Trim Region Patch command


1. Model a solid body that fills a complex opening. Model the body to include
the shut-off faces of the mold.

Parting body and patch body, with


Parting body and patch body.
patch body highlighted.

2. On the Mold Tools toolbar, click Trim Region Patch .

3. In the Target group, with Select Body active , select the solid patch body.

4. In the Boundary group, from the Type list, select Body/Curve.


You can also traverse a loop of edges or curves that define the opening to
be patched.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-25


Mold tools

5. In the Boundary group, with Select Object active, select the boundary
object.
In the following graphic, the parting body is selected as the boundary.

6. In the Region group, with Select Region active, click in the region to
keep or the region to discard.
In the following graphic, the region to keep is selected.

8-26 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

7. Select Keep or Discard, depending on the region you identified in the


preceding step.

8. (Optional) If you want to modify the sheet before you identify it as a patch
sheet, in the Setting group, clear the As Patch Surface check box.

9. (Optional) If you want to use a different color to identify the core and
cavity patch sheets extract from the target solid, click the Patch Color
swatch and specify the color.

10. Click OK or Apply.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-27


Mold tools

Core and cavity patch sheets

The faces are extracted and trimmed to form the trim region patch faces.
If the trimming operation is successful, sheets for both the cavity and core
parting regions are created and added to a patch feature set.

8-28 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Enlarge Surface Patch overview


You can use the Enlarge Surface Patch command to create an enlarged copy
of a selected face. You can dynamically control the size of the patch up sheet
by using U and V direction sliders.
There are two methods to extend the edges of the sheet:
• Linear

• Natural

The copy may have slightly different UV parameterization than the


original.
Copies of certain face types, such as spheres, might have a hole in the
center.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Enlarge Surface Patch


Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Menu Tools®Enlarge Surface Patch

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-29


Mold tools

Create a patch sheet by enlarging a surface

1. On the Mold Tools toolbar, click Enlarge Surface Patch .

2. With the Enlarge Surface Patch dialog box open and Select a Surface
active in the Target group, select a face.
(1) — A slightly enlarged copy of the face is displayed.
(2) — Vector arrows represent the directions of the U and V
parameter directions.
(3) — A trim boundary is highlighted. The default boundary consists
of all edges of the selected face.
(4) — A temporary point is displayed to indicate the part of the
sheet that will be kept after it is trimmed.

3. (Optional) In the Settings group, clear the Change All Sizes check box if
you want to adjust the sheet edges individually.

4. If necessary, drag the sheet to the size you want.

8-30 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

5. (Optional) Clear the Cut to Boundary check box if you do not wish to
identify a trim boundary for the patch up sheet.

6. (Optional) Clear the As Existing Surface check box if you do not wish to
create a patch set with dedicated copies of the enlarged sheet for core
and cavity trim sheets.

7. (Optional) If necessary, select boundary objects.

In the following graphic, the boundary has open ends . You can select
the edge of a patch sheet to create a closed boundary.

8. If you specified a boundary, in the Region group, select a point on the


surface, and select Keep or Discard.

9. Click OK.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-31


Mold tools

Create a patch sheet by enlarging a surface

1. On the Mold Tools toolbar, click Enlarge Surface Patch .

2. With the Enlarge Surface Patch dialog box open and Select Face active
in the Target group, select a face.
(1) — A slightly enlarged copy of the face is displayed.
(2) — Vector arrows represent the directions of the U and V
parameter directions.
(3) — A trim boundary is highlighted. The default boundary consists
of all edges of the selected face.
(4) — A temporary point is displayed to indicate the part of the
sheet that will be kept after it is trimmed.

3. (Optional) In the Settings group, clear the Change All Sizes check box if
you want to adjust the sheet edges individually.

4. If necessary, drag the sheet to the size you want.

8-32 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

5. (Optional) Clear the Cut to Boundary check box if you do not wish to
identify a trim boundary for the patch up sheet.

6. (Optional) Clear the As Patch Surface check box if you do not wish to
create a patch set with dedicated copies of the enlarged sheet for core
and cavity trim sheets.

7. (Optional) If necessary, select boundary objects.

In the following graphic, the boundary has open ends . You can select
the edge of a patch sheet to create a closed boundary.

8. If you specified a boundary, in the Region group, select a point on the


surface, and select Keep or Discard.

9. Click OK.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-33


Mold tools

Enlarge Surface Patch dialog box


Target
Select Face Lets you select a face. An enlarged
copy of the selected face is made.
Boundary

Available when the Cut to Boundary check box is selected.


Select Object Lets you select curves, edges, or faces
as trim geometry.
Face to Enlarge Lists faces that you select as
boundary faces. Boundary faces are
automatically enlarged. You can drag
boundary faces until they intersect
with the target face.
Region

Select Region Lets you select a point on the surface


to be enlarged. The point is used with
the Keep and Discard options.
Keep Keeps the surface region that includes
point you select with Select Region
active.
Discard Discards the surface region that
includes point you select with Select
Region active.
Settings

Change All Sizes Moves all drag handles the same


proportional distance.
When the check box is cleared, the
drag handles work independently.
Cut to Boundary Lets you select a boundary of curves,
edges, or faces. The boundary must
divide the enlarged surface into at
8 least two areas, only one of which is
retained.
As Patch Surface Moves the original sheet to the hidden
object layer, and creates copies in the
core and cavity layers.
When the check box is cleared, only
one face is created. Use this option
when you want to do further editing
on the sheet before you identify it as
a patch sheet.

8-34 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Patch Color Specifies the color for both patch


sheets.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-35


Mold tools

Activity
In the Mold tools section, do the following activity:
• Enlarge Surface patch

8-36 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Trim Solid
You can use the Trim Solid command to:
• Create a bounding box.

• Trim a bounding box to faces in the model.

• Subtract the model from a box.

• Move faces on a new or existing box.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Trim Solid


Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Menu Tools®Trim Solid

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-37


Mold tools

Use the Trim Solid command


Create and shape a box

1. On the Mold Tools toolbar, click Trim Solid , or choose Tools®Process


Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Trim Solid.

2. In the Trim Solid dialog box, from the Type list, select Face.

3. Select geometry to define the extent of the box.

4. If you selected faces or a predefined region, in the Settings group, define


the Trim Type.
• Trim
• Subtract
• Keep Region and Box

5. (Optional) If you selected faces and the trim method, you can select
additional faces to complete the trim by clicking:

• Faces inside Bounding Box


8
• Faces inside/crossing Bounding Box

6. (Optional) In the Preview group, click Show Result to examine the


pending result.

7. (Optional) In the Trim Face group, click Reverse Direction to reverse the
trim direction.

8. Click OK or Apply.

8-38 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Edit a bounding box

1. On the Mold Tools toolbar, click Trim Solid , or choose Tools®Process


Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Trim Solid.

2. In the Trim Solid dialog box, in the Target group, click Select Body .

3. Select the bounding box to edit.

4. Click Edit Bounding Box .

5. Drag one or more of the bounding box face handles until the bounding box
is the size you want.

6. Click OK or Apply.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-39


Mold tools

Trim Solid dialog box


Type
Type list Lets you specify the type of objects
that will define the bounding box.
Face
Selects faces.
Sheet Body
Selects sheet bodies.
Manufacturing Region
Selects face sets defined with
the Manufacturing Geometry
command.
Trim Face

Selection option Lets you select one or more faces.


Depending on your Type setting, you
can select faces, sheet body faces, or
manufacturing region tagged faces.
You can specify that faces inside the
bounding box be selected, or faces
that cross the boundaries of the
current box also be selected.
Target
Lets you select one or more target
bodies.
Select Body
Lets you select one or more target
components.
Select Target Component
Lets you edit the bounding box as you
8 create it. You can drag handles to
resize the bounding box.
Edit Bounding Box
Settings

8-40 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Trim Type Lets you specify the type of trimming:


Trim
Trims the box using the target
sheet body faces.
The faces must form a
contiguous region large
enough to trim the box.

Subtract
Subtracts the box from the target
solid body.
Keep Region and Box
Keeps both the face region and
the bounding box so you can do
additional work with modeling
commands.
Remove Parameters Lets you specify whether the
parameters of the trimmed body
should be removed when the body is
trimmed.
Bounding Box Clearance Lets you specify a clearance for the
bounding box.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-41


Mold tools

Replace Solid
Use the Replace Solid command to define a bounding box that uses the
underlying definitions of selected faces to replace box faces.
You can:
• Use the entire area of a selected face, or specify it as a boundary reference
only.

• Use the current normal direction of the face or use the reverse normal
direction.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Replace Solid


Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Menu Tools®Replace Solid

8-42 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Using the Replace Solid command


Define a box

1. On the Mold Tools toolbar, click Replace Solid , or choose


Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Replace Solid.

2. Select faces to establish the size and trim of the box.

The design intent in the following examples is to create this box.

3. In the Replacement Face group, select the Create Bounding Box check
box.

4. Click OK or Apply.

Edit the bounding box


1. In the Replace Solid dialog box, in the Boundary group, click Edit

Bounding Box . 8
When you clickEdit Bounding Box in the Replace Solid dialog box,
you cannot select an existing box as you can when you choose Edit
Bounding box in the Trim Solid dialog box.

2. To change the size of the box, you can:


• Continue to select faces.

• In the Settings group, in the Clearance box, type a new stock


allowance to change all six faces to the same value.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-43


Mold tools

• Drag any of the six faces by its handle.

• Enter values in the dynamic input box for any selected handle.

3. (Optional) Click Set WCS to change the orientation of the box edges and
faces.

8-44 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Replace Solid dialog box


Replacement Face
Lets you select faces to define a
bounding box.
Select Object
Reverses the normal of the
corresponding bounding box face, so
Reverse Direction the box occupies a volume outside
that of the parent body of the selected
face.
Create Bounding Box Creates the bounding box.
Boundary

Lets you modify the faces of the solid


by editing the boundary box.
Edit Boundary Box
Settings
Remove Parameters Lets you specify whether the
parameters are removed during the
replacement.
Clearance Specifies the amount of extra stock
added to the box on all six sides
beyond selected bounding box faces.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-45


Mold tools

Extend Solid overview


You can use the Extend Solid command to extend a solid face. There are
two methods:
• Offset — Moves a face along its normal direction.

• Extrude — Sweeps the face edges in the normal direction, with optional
draft.

8
Where do I find it?
Application Mold Wizard
Toolbar
Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Extend Solid
Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Tools®Extend Solid

8-46 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Extend a solid face

1. On the Mold Tools toolbar, click Extend Solid .

2. Select a face.

3. Specify an offset distance:


• Drag the arrow handle.

• In the dialog box, in the Offset Value box, enter a value.

• In the graphics window input box, enter a value.

4. (Optional) Select the Extrude check box to extend the solid by sweeping
the face edges in the face normal direction.
The resulting swept body is automatically united with the parent
body.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-47


Mold tools

5. (Optional) If the Extrude check box is selected, in the Draft Value box,
you can enter a draft value.

6. Click OK or Apply.

8-48 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Extend Solid dialog box


Option Description
Select Face Lets you select a single face to extend.
Extends the solid by moving the face the offset distance in
its normal direction.
Offset Value
Positive values enlarge the body, negative values
make it smaller.

Available when you select the Extrude check box.

Draft Value Adds a draft angle to an extruded extension.


You can enter either a positive or a negative value.

When selected, uses the extrude method instead of the


Extrude
offset method.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-49


Mold tools

Reference Blend overview


You can use the Reference Blend command to link the radius of a new blend
on selected edges from one or more bodies to that of an existing blend
or cylindrical face .

8
Where do I find it?
Application Mold Wizard
Toolbar
Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Reference Blend
Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Tools®Reference Blend

8-50 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Create reference blends


To generate a blended feature using the Reference Blend command, do the
following:

1. On the Mold Tools toolbar, click Reference Blend .

2. In the Reference Blend dialog box, in the Reference Face group, click

Select Face if it is not active.

3. Select an existing blend or cylindrical face to extract its radius


information.

4. In the Edge to Blend group, click Select Edge .

5. Select one or more edges to blend.


The blend edges can be on a different solid body.

To enable selection of hidden edges as shown in the preceding


figure, you need not display them.
On the Selection bar, select Allow Selection of Hidden Wireframe

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-51


Mold tools

6. Click OK or Apply.

8-52 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Reference Blend dialog box


Reference Face
Lets you select an existing blend or
cylindrical face to associatively control the
new blend’s radius.
Select Face
Edge to Blend

Lets you select one or more edges to apply


a blend with the measured radius from the
referenced face. Association is maintained
Select Edge
between the referenced face and the
modified edges.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-53


Mold tools

Activities
In the Mold tools section, do the following activities:
• Trim Solid and Reference Blend

• Replace Solid and Trim Region Patch

8-54 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Merge Cavities overview


You can design inserts consisting of multiple workpieces.
You have the option to unite several bodies to combine them, or to subtract
several workpiece bodies from an overall insert body that encompasses all
the individual volumes.
The following figure shows four insert bodies of a product that are molded
together.

The following figures show the merged core and merged cavity.

Where do I find it?


8
Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Merge Cavities


Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Menu Tools®Merge Cavities

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-55


Mold tools

Merge Cavities dialog box

8-56 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Merge cavities into a single insert

Unite multiple workpieces

1. On the Mold Tools toolbar, click Merge Cavities .

2. In the Merge Cavities dialog box, in the Component group, from the list,
select the type of parts to merge. The example parts provided include:
• Cavity — comb-cavity

• Core — comb-core

• Workpiece — comb-wp

Bodies modeled in the selected part are now selectable; other bodies
are not selectable.
You can use the example parts, or create your own.

3. Select two bodies to unite.


The two bodies must exist in the part selected from the list:
The bodies must be in contact or overlap so that the Boolean unite
operation can succeed.

4. In the Design Methods group, select Unite Body in Target.

5. (Optional) In the Settings group, select Rename Components.

6. Click OK or Apply.

7. (Optional) If you selected Rename Components, in the Part Name


Management dialog box, specify the part name you want to use for the
merged component.
8
You should select Rename Components when you create a new
node; otherwise, a default name is assigned — new_component1,
new_component2, and so on.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-57


Mold tools

Subtract workpieces from a common target

1. On the Mold Tools toolbar, click Merge Cavities .

2. In the Merge Cavities dialog box, in the Component group, from the list,
select one of the choices of objects to merge:
• Cavity — comb-cavity

• Core — comb-core

• Workpiece — comb-wp

A suitable large target body must exist in the part you select.
Bodies modeled in the selected part are now selectable; other bodies
are not selectable.

3. Select bodies to subtract.


The target and other bodies must exist in the part selected from
the list:
The bodies must overlap so that the Boolean subtract operation
can succeed.

4. In the Design Methods group, select Subtract Body from Target.

5. (Optional) In the Settings group, select Rename Components.


You should select Rename Components when you create a new
node; otherwise, a default name is assigned — new_component1,
new_component2, and so on .

6. Click OK or Apply.

8 7. (Optional) In the Part Name Management dialog box, specify the part
name you want to use for the new merged component.
The Part Name Management dialog box is opened when the Rename
Components check box is selected.

8-58 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Merge Cavities dialog box


Components
list The list has two columns:
• Component — Shows the names of merged components
in the assembly.

• Attribute — Shows the named attributes that must exist


in parts so that they appear in this list.

Right click an existing node to choose:


• Create Component — Create a new component in the
assembly, and add a line for it in the list.

• Remove Component — Remove the current merged


component from the assembly.

The following choices do not appear in an empty list.

Right-click the background of the list to choose:


• Export to Browser — Exports the list of merged
components and their attribute names to a temporary
HTML file.

• Export to Spreadsheet — Exports the list of merged


components and their attribute names to a new
spreadsheet file.
Select Object Selects bodies to unite or to subtract from a common target.
Design Methods
Unite Body in Target Specifies that bodies you select are united together.
Subtract Body from Target Specifies that bodies you select are subtracted from a
common target.
Link Only Specifies that bodies you select are linked from a common
target. 8
The cavity/core bodies are not combined.
Settings
Rename Components Opens the Part Name Management dialog box after you click
OK or Apply.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-59


Mold tools

Activity
In the Mold tools section, do the following activity:
• Merge cavities

8-60 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Design Inserts overview


You can use the Design Inserts command on the Mold Tools toolbar to:
• Select any body to use as a sub-insert.

• Design a foot shape for the sub-insert.

• Automatically create a new component containing your sub-insert body


design and a standard foot.

You can copy a sub-insert to other places in the mold.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard


Toolbar
Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Design Inserts
Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Menu
Tools®Design Inserts 8

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-61


Mold tools

Create a Design Insert


1. Create a body to use as the sub-insert head.
The body must be selectable in the product subassembly *_prod for the
active product. If there is more than one product in the tooling assembly,
the active product is the product selected in the Family Mold dialog box.

2. (Optional) Specify the parent for the insert.


The default is Owning Part. You can also select PROD, Owning Parent, or
Work Part.

3. In the Design Inserts dialog box, in the Reference Plane group, click
Select Object and select the planar face in which you are going to make a
pocket to hold the sub-insert foot.

4. In the Sub-insert Solid group, click Select Object, and select the solid
body for the sub-insert head.
The size of the body is measured and used to define initial values in the
parameter list.

5. In the Foot group, in the Foot Type list, select the foot shape you want to
use.

6. (Optional) Select parameters to edit in the list, and type the values you
want in the edit box.

7. (Optional) In the Settings group, select the Rename Components check


box.

8. Click OK or Apply.

8-62 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Design Inserts dialog box


Selecting a Parent Part lets you specify where you want the insert to sit in
your assembly. If you move the parent in the design, the insert moves with it.
Owning Part Specifies that the body in which the insert is created is
the parent.

Owning Parent Specifies that the insert is at the same level as all
the other children of the subassembly, and that the
subassembly is the parent.

PROD Specifies that the product subassembly is the parent.

Work Part Specifies that the current work part is the parent.
Reference Plane
Select Bottom Lets you select the plate face into which the foot body
Face pocket will be cut.
Sub-insert Solid
Select Object Lets you select a solid body as the sub-insert head.
Foot
Foot Type Lets you select the shape, either Box or Cylinder, and
displays the corresponding parameters in the bitmap
image.
You can select a parameter in the list and change its
value.

Parameter list for X_L — Foot dimension along the X-axis.


Box type
Y_L — Foot dimension along the Y-axis.
Z_L — Foot dimension along the Z-axis.
x1 — Offset as shown.
y1 — Offset as shown.
8
x1_clr — Foot clearance on the negative X side.
x2_clr — Foot clearance on the positive X side.
y1_clr — Foot clearance on the negative Y side.
y2_clr — Foot clearance on the positive Y side.
head_clr — Head clearance.
head_clr_h — Head clearance height.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-63


Mold tools

Parameter list for D — Foot diameter.


Cylinder type
Z_L — Foot height.
D_clr — Foot diameter clearance.
X1 — Offset as shown.
Y1 — Offset as shown.
head_clr — Head clearance.
head_clr_h — Head clearance height.
Settings
Rename Opens the Part Name Management dialog box.
Components
Edit Register File Opens the register spreadsheet.
Edit Database Opens the database spreadsheet.

8-64 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Activity
In the Mold tools section, do the following activity:
• Design a sub-insert and foot

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-65


Mold tools

Tooling Motion Simulation


Use the Motion Simulation command to:
• Clone a predefined kinematic model for tooling into your current assembly
or a directory you specify.

• Mount assembly components to an imported kinematic model


automatically or manually.

• Generate and import control data to an imported kinematic model


according to die settings.

• Define cam and slide kinematic components.

• Run a motion simulation to view the operations.

The Motion Simulation command is used in the Mold Wizard and Progressive
Die Wizardapplications.
A complete mold assembly can have thousands of components. Both halves of
the mold open and close continuously. The motion can be complicated, with a
complex structure and movement including slides, lifters, and ejectors that
all move during the open-and-close cycle.
When you simulate the motion of your tooling assembly, you can locate and
resolve potential interference problems before the assembly is built.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

8-66 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Tooling Motion Simulation

Toolbar
Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Menu Tools®Tooling Motion Simulation

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-67


Mold tools

Tooling Motion Simulation dialog box


Type
List
Add Kinematic Model
Clones a new set of kinematic parts and adds them to
the current tooling assembly as a subassembly.

Mount Component
Lets you identify components as belonging to a specific
kinematic category, such as fixed or moving components,
and so on.

Define Cam
Lets you define automatic or user defined cam motion.

Run Simulation
Displays an animation showing the kinematics of all
automatic and user-identified components.
The following options and groups that appear depend on what you select
from the Type list.
Kinematic Model

Appears when Add Kinematic Model is selected in the Type group.


list Lets you select a kinematic model template.
One template is provided as an example.
Target Directory Sets the folder to which the kinematic components are
cloned.
Typically, you should place the kinematic model in a
location that is included in you search paths, or with
the tooling assembly.
8

8-68 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Kinematic Parameter

Appears when Add Kinematic Model is selected in the Type group, and a
kinematic model has not yet been added to the tooling assembly.
Select Kinematic Lists the available kinematic models. An example is
Model provided.
If you have a Machine Tool Builder license, you can edit
a copy of the example, or create a new kinematic model
template.
Two-plate Style Specifies whether the mold assembly has two or three
plates.
Three-plate Style
Mold Wizard Lets you define the following kinematic parameters for a
parameters mold assembly:
Machine Stroke
Sets the injection mold open distance.
Ejection Distance
Sets the distance over which the plastic model is
ejected when the mold opens.

The following parameters appear only when Three-plate


Style is selected.
Pull Runner Distance
Sets distance over which runners are pulled.
Injection Relief Distance

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-69


Mold tools

The following options and groups that appear depend on what you select
from the Type list.
Component Mounting

Appears when Mount Component is selected in the Type group.


list Lets you select one of the motion nodes in the kinematic model.
For Mold Wizard, you can choose:
Move
This node of the kinematic model is the motion driver.
Add plates such as BP, UP, CP, and so on, and other plates
and hardware attached to these plates.
Fix
This is the fixed node of the kinematic model. If you
reposition it, everything else moves with it.
Add fixed parts such as the A-plates.
Ejection
This node of the kinematic model is used to push product
out of the mold.
Add parts such as ejectors, lifters, and the ejector plates.
Injection
This node of the kinematic model moves along the Z-axis.
Stripper
Product
This node of the kinematic model first moves along Z-axis
and then along the X-axis.
Add product components to this node.
Select Lets you select components when you highlight a node in the
8 Object list. Selected components are added to the node, and included
in the simulation.
Components are added to the node only when you click
Apply while Type is set to Mount Component.

8-70 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Define Cam

Appears when Define Cam is selected in the Type group.


Definition In both methods, a kinematic structure is set up to transfer
method vertical motion in the mold to a horizontal motion.
Automatically Defined Cam
Lets you select a cam assembly that has the attributes and
expressions already defined:
User Defined Cam
Lets you specify the cam body and driver body by selecting
them in the assembly, specifying a direction vector, and
setting the moving distance.

Available when User Defined Cam is selected.


Opens the Linear Cam dialog box, where you can define the cam.
Define
Cam
Run Simulation

Appears when Run Simulation is selected in the Type group.


Opens the Run Simulation dialog box, which is also used in Die
Validation. See the Die Validation Help for more information.
Run
Simulation

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-71


Mold tools

Activity
In the Mold tools section, do the following activity:
• Simulate the mold assembly motion

8-72 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Other commands
The following topics describe other commands that are available on the Mold
Tools toolbar.
For additional information on these commands, consult the online Help.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-73


Mold tools

Parting Check overview

You can use the Parting Check command to find interference or gaps between
the shrink part and mold inserts. The software maps the color and attribute
of the faces in the shrink part to corresponding contacting faces in the mold
part based on:
• Touch interference

• Hard interference

• No interference

Where do I find it?


Application Mold Wizard
Toolbar
Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Parting Check
Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Tools®Parting Check

8-74 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

WAVE Control overview

You can use the WAVE Control command to freeze parts.

Frozen parts do not update until they are unfrozen.

The MW WAVE Control dialog box:

• Shows the change status of each frozen part containing wave linked
features.

• Allows you to remove parts that are marked out of date without geometry
changes from the NX update list.

• Provides immediate access to the Model Comparison command to permit


you to examine geometry changes.

Mold Wizard assemblies can have a large number of WAVE linked features.
WAVE linked features can become out-of-date even when they undergo
trivial changes that do not change any geometry, for example, if you replay
the feature history in a part with frozen child parts, the frozen parts have
no changes, but they will be out of date. Such parts are marked with an
asterisk ( * ).
Updating out-of-date linked features without geometry changes, especially
in large assemblies, may result in decreased performance. You can safely
remove such parts from the update list.
Frozen parts that are out of date with pending geometry changes are marked
with a plus sign. You can compare such parts to determine the extent of
changes, and you can update them.
The typical workflow for WAVE control is:

1. In the View Manager Browser, freeze downstream components, for


example, freeze all Electrodes.
8
2. Perform design changes to the original product model or the core and
cavity design.

3. Determine if parts marked out-of-date have actual geometry changes.

4. Remove parts that do not require updating from the list.

5. Perform updates as needed.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-75


Mold tools

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Wave Control


Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Menu Tools®Wave Control

8-76 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Manufacturing Geometry

Use the Manufacturing Geometry command to add manufacturing attributes


to faces to be identified by downstream manufacturing. In the Manufacturing
Geometry dialog box, you interact by right-clicking nodes in the tree diagram
and selecting shortcut menu commands.
You can:
• Define manufacturing color standards.

• Customize manufacturing methods.

• Add, modify, or delete attributes of different objects that are included


in the grouped faces.

• Assign machining attributes to target surfaces of the machined parts


which helps in selecting faces for CAM operations.

Where do I find it?

Modeling, Electrode Design, Mold Wizard, Progressive


Application Die Wizard.

(Modeling) Die Design®Manufacturing Geometry


(Electrode Design) Electrode Design®Manufacturing

Geometry
(Mold Wizard) Mold Wizard®Mold

Tools®Manufacturing Geometry
(Progressive Die Wizard) Progressive Die

Toolbar Tools®Manufacturing Geometry


(Modeling) Tools®Vehicle Manufacturing 8
Automation®Die Design®Manufacturing Geometry
(Electrode Design) Tools®Process Specific®Electrode
Design®Manufacturing Geometry
(Mold Wizard) Tools®Process Specific®Mold
Wizard®Mold Tools®Manufacturing Geometry
(Progressive Die Wizard) Tools®Process
Specific®Progressive Die Tools®Manufacturing
Menu Geometry

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-77


Mold tools

Manufacturing Geometry dialog box

8-78 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Static Interference Check

Use the Static Interference Check command to analyze selected solid bodies
for overlap and to report the type of interferences found.
A static interference check helps you improve your design by showing you
where interferences or missed pockets occur.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard


Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Static Interference Check
Toolbar
Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Menu Tools®Static Interference Check

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-79


Mold tools

8-80 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Calculate Area overview

You can use the Calculate Area command to find, for a selected body:
• The projected area of the body on a plane.

• The projected dimensions of the body in two directions perpendicular


to the projection direction.

• The height of the body in the projection direction.

• The volume of the body.

• The total surface area of the body.

You can use the Find Maximum and Minimum Side Area option to calculate
the angle of planes rotated along the Z-axis to obtain the maximum and
minimum projection area, and the projection dimensions for each.
The calculation uses a finite element mesh method to obtain results quickly.
You can increase accuracy at the cost of speed by specifying a smaller
tolerance.
For EDM machining, you can use the projected area to estimate the required
ram force and the height to calculate the ram travel distance.
You can also use the projected area to estimate the required molding pressure.

Where do I find it?


Application Mold Wizard
Toolbar
Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Calculate Area
Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Tools®Calculate Area

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-81


Mold tools

Project
In the Projects section, do the project:
• Mold Tools

8-82 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold tools

Summary
The Mold Tools toolbar provides a suite of functions for automating different
stages of the mold design process.
In this lesson you:
• Identified holes requiring patches, and selected an appropriate method
from Edge Patch, Enlarge Surface Patch, Trim Region Patch.

• Used patches to create shut off geometry.

• Used the Create Box command to create a patch solid.

• Used the solid split function to associatively trim geometry.

• Created a single work piece for multiple cavity impressions.

• Designed a sub-insert.

• Simulated a completed mold design.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 8-83


8
Lesson

9 Partings

Purpose
You will learn how to identify or create parting geometry. You will complete
the topic by creating associative tooling bodies.

Objective
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Identify core and cavity regions.

• Create parting regions and curves.

• Define and edit guide lines.

• Construct and edit parting surfaces.

• Add user defined parting sheets.

• Create linked core and cavity models.

• Compare the product model with a revised version.

• Swap the product model for a revised version.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-1


Partings

Molded Part Validation


Use Molded Part Validation
Molded Part Validation consists of two commands: Check Regions and
Check Wall Thickness.
Use the Check Regions command, along with the Check Wall Thickness
command to assess whether parts can be manufactured by traditional molding
processes such as injection molding, die casting, sand casting, and so on.
• Analyze the model faces for draft angles, color faces according to their
draft conditions, find faces that cross over the parting, find undercut faces
and edges, and split faces.

• Divide the faces of the product model into cavity and core regions and
display parting line loops, internal loops, parting edges, and incomplete
loops.

• Examine properties for individual faces, properties for the model (sheet or
solid), and identify sharp corners.

Use the Check Wall Thickness command to:


• To analyze and view the wall thickness of any area or all areas in a solid
model.

• Use the tools provided on the Inspect and Options tab to visually inspect
the analysis results.

9-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Where do I find it?


Modeling
Application Mold Wizard
Menu Analysis®Molded Part Validation
Mold Wizard®Mold Parting Tools®Region Analysis

Toolbar

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-3


Partings

Check Regions — Calculate tab


Product Body and Direction
Lets you select the body to be analyzed. If there is only one
body in the part file, it is automatically selected.
Select
Product
Body
Lets you specify a draw direction other than the default Z+ axis.

Specify
Draw
Direction
Calculate

Keep Performs the analysis and applies the results only to new faces.
Existing For example, if faces were split, you can use this option to
identify new faces and retain the core and cavity assignment
for previously-analyzed faces.
Edit Lets you edit the core and cavity identification of previously
Regions analyzed faces. No analysis is performed. This option is useful,
Only for example, when you have a vertical face that is not assigned,
and you know the region in which you are going to mold it.
Reset All Performs the analysis and applies the information to all faces.
Begins the analysis.

Calculate

9-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Check Regions — Face tab

Face Draft Angle


Highlight Highlights all selected faces by default. If the All check box in
Selected the Face Draft Angle group is not selected, then this option
Faces highlights only the faces whose check boxes you select.

= All = Negative < 3.00


Draft Angle Specifies the limit that defines two subsets of drafted
Limit faces—faces that have at least the specified draft angle, and
faces that have less than the specified draft angle. You can
change this number after the initial calculation, and then
press Enter to recalculate the results.
All Displays a tally of the faces in each range in the Count
Positive column. The total face count includes the count for Crossover
Vertical Faces.
Negative
Applies the colors specified by the various swatches to the
corresponding faces. If you click the color swatch in the All
row, and change the color, you must click Apply to apply the
Set Color of
new color.
All Faces
Positive >= 3
Positive < 3
Negative < 3
Undercut

Specifies which items to display for the selected range of faces.


Crossover Displays faces that cross over the parting. You can use the
Faces Face Split command to split crossover faces at their parting
so that they can be assigned to the cavity or core.
Undercut Identifies groups of faces that are invisible from both core
Areas and cavity sides.
Undercut Identifies edges that are invisible from both core and cavity 9
Edges sides.
Translucency Change the translucency of groups of faces, either selected or
sliders non-selected.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-5


Partings

Commands

Face Split Opens the Split Face dialog box, where you can split crossover
faces before assigning them to cavity or core regions.
Face Draft Opens the dialog box where you can get more detailed visual
Analysis feedback on the draft angles in the faces of your part.

9-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Check Regions — Region tab

Define Regions
Cavity Region Displays the number of faces in the cavity. Use the
color swatch to change the color of these faces to
better identify them.
Core Region Displays the number of faces in the core. Use the
color swatch to change the color of these faces to
better identify them.
Translucency sliders Adjust the translucency of core and cavity faces.

Undefined Region Displays the number of faces that NX cannot


automatically recognize as belonging to either the
cavity or the core. Use the color swatches to change
the color of these regions.
Crossover Region Faces
Identifies faces that cross the parting line.
Crossover Vertical Faces
Identifies faces with zero degree draft that cross
the parting line.
Unknown Faces
Identifies faces that have no visibility properties
defined.
Displays model faces in the colors currently identified
by the swatches for cavity, core, and undefined faces.
Set Regions Color
Assign to Region

Lets you select an undefined region that you can


then assign to either the cavity or the core region by
selecting the option that you want. After you assign
Select Region Faces
faces to a region, they are identified by attributes for
use with other parting commands.
Settings

Lets you select parting line checks.


Internal Loops Lists the number of parting lines that are usually 9
found on openings not connected to the outside
perimeter of the part. For example, any through
hole should have an internal parting line loop that
defines the parting surface for that area.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-7


Partings

Parting Edges Lists the number of perimeter edges that define, or


partly define, the external parting surfaces.
Incomplete Loops Lists the number of parting lines that do not form a
closed loop.

9-8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Check Regions — Information tab

Check Scope
These options specify what element of the model you want to inspect. The
available options depend on the option you select in this group.
Face Properties

Lets you select a face to analyze, and then provides information on the face
type, such as planar or cylindrical, radius for cylindrical faces, draft angle
information, and area.
Model Properties

Lets you indicate whether you want information on boundary edges, then
provides information on the model type, such as solid or sheet boundary
information for a sheet, dimensions, area, number of faces, and number
of edges.
Sharp Corners

Sharp Angle Defines the angle limit for sharp corners and sharp edges. If
Limit corners or edges have angles smaller than this number, they
are identified.
Sharp Edges
Indicates that you want to check for edges smaller than
the limit.
Range Type
Groups small corner radius faces using the following filters:
Uniform divides the ranges evenly between upper and
lower limits.
Range lets you specify the range limit and select a range
to highlight.
Plain specifies a set of values and a range of plus and
minus numbers for each of those values. If you select
Single Tolerance, a single value is used as both the plus
and the minus value.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-9


Partings

Assign undefined faces using the Region tab

This example shows how to assign undefined faces after a region analysis.
The analysis automatically assigns faces to either the cavity or the core
region. When it cannot identify which region faces should belong to, it
categorizes them as undefined.
To assign undefined faces to the cavity or core region:
1. In the Check Regions dialog box, on the Region tab, click Select Region

Faces , then select an undefined face of the part.


In this example, the turquoise crossover vertical face will be assigned
to the cavity region.

In the Assign To group, select Cavity Region.Click Apply.


The face displays in the cavity region color.

9
Identify faces for cavity and core regions

To assign face attributes to identify them to parting commands as cavity or


core faces, on the Region tab, click Set Regions Color.

9-10 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Analyze and edit faces using the Face tab

1. Choose Analysis®Molded Part Validation→Check Regions.

2. In the graphics window, select the body to be analyzed.


If the current part contains one body, it is automatically selected.

3. Specify a draw direction.

4. Click Calculate .
When the calculation is complete, OK is available and the results appear
on other tabs in the Check Regions dialog box. Do not click OK at this
time.

5. Click the Face tab.


The calculation is done with the default draft angle limit. You can type
a new value in the Draft Angle Limit box. When you press Enter, the
analysis is recalculated.

6. Observe the count of faces in the Draft Angle and Undercut groups:
• With at least the minimum draft.
• With less than the minimum draft.
• With no draft at all (vertical).
• That cross over the parting.
• That are undercut.

7. Select the check box for each category that has faces in the Count column.
The faces for that group are highlighted.
In this example, the analysis found four vertical faces.

8. Click Set Color of All Faces .


The faces are colored according to the color swatches for each group.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-11


Partings

Check Wall Thickness — Calculate tab


Body
Lets you select the body to be analyzed. If there is only one
body in the part file, it is automatically selected.
Select Body
Size
Controls the mesh of sample points at which thickness is checked.
Sample Point Adjusts the mesh size parameters. Drag the slider, or type
Settings measurements in the boxes. A finer setting is more precise,
but it increases the calculation time.
Maximum The maximum that any given thickness can deviate from
Thickness the stated thickness.
Tolerance
Maximum The maximum spacing between sampling points.
Spacing

Method

Ray Projects a ray with a direction as the normal of a start point


on a surface until the ray intersects another point on a facet
of the mesh. The thickness at the start point is defined as
the distance between the start and end points.
Project to Face in Ray Method
Projects intersecting points on facets of the mesh to
the adjacent surfaces before calculating the distance
between the points.
This option makes the results slightly more accurate
because end points do not necessarily lie on the surface.
Larger mesh sizes have more deviation than smaller
mesh sizes.
Rolling Ball Calculates thickness by a method similar to an inflatable
ball that is constrained within the walls of a solid object.
The ball contacts a solid face at one point and expands until
it contacts the adjacent faces, creating the largest ball that
can fit within the face constraints. The diameter of the ball
is the reported thickness.
9 Use this method when you want to find the maximum
thickness of any solid body. It is not recommended for models
with a high volume to surface ratio, like cubes, because the
calculations involved can be very slow.

9-12 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Process Results
Performs the wall thickness calculation.

Calculate
Thickness
Stores the analysis results in the part file.
The part now uses more disk space; however, in subsequent
Save Results sessions you can display the results without waiting for the
calculation to finish.
Deletes saved analysis results from the part file.
You can save only one set of results in any one part file.
Delete Saved Subsequent results will overwrite the existing ones.
Results
Overall Displays the results for the average thickness and maximum
Results thickness in the analyzed part.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-13


Partings

Check Wall Thickness

You can use the Check Wall Thickness dialog box to view the wall thickness
of any area in a solid model. You can choose color fringe or vector line display.
You can directly select faces in the view, specify a thickness range, or select
all faces. You can adjust the translucency of selected and non-selected faces
to help you visually inspect the results. You can also change the color of the
faces.

9-14 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Rolling Ball method


The Rolling Ball algorithm calculates thickness by a method similar to an
inflatable ball that is constrained within the walls of a solid object. The ball
contacts a solid face at one point and expands until it contacts the adjacent
faces, creating the largest ball that can fit within the face constraints. The
diameter of the ball is the reported thickness.
Use this method when you want to find the maximum thickness of any
solid body.

Example of an Expanding Ball Within a Solid


The Rolling Ball method is not recommended for models with a high
volume to surface ratio, like cubes, because the calculation can be slow.

Rolling Ball Results

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-15


Partings

Ray method
The Ray algorithm uses a finite element mesh to approximate the solid.
The measurement at any one vertex is taken as the perpendicular distance
to an opposing facet.
The mesh created is similar to the approximation you get from a facetted
face. There is a balance between processing speed and accuracy. You can
increase the accuracy by selecting the Project to Face option. This causes
the calculated mesh vertices to be projected to their parent faces before the
perpendicular distance to opposite facets is measured.

9-16 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Check the wall thickness of a part

1. Choose Analysis®Molded Part Validation→Check Wall Thickness .

2. Click the Options tab.

3. Select the display and output options you want for this analysis.
For this example:

• Ranges Type = Uniform

• Legend Control = Blend

• Output Options = Display Thickness Vectors and Display Mesh


Elements

4. Click the Calculate tab.


There is only one body, so it is selected by default.

5. Select a calculation method.


For this example:

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-17


Partings

Calculation Method = Rolling Ball.

6. Click Calculate Thickness .

9-18 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Activity
In the Partings section, do the following activity:
• Molded Part Validation

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-19


Partings

Parting methods overview


Parting is the process of dividing a model into regions formed by the two
halves of a mold, and by moving pieces in the mold such as slides and lifters.
You can use the Mold Parting Tools and Mold Tools toolbars for
parting-related commands.

Parting elements
There are several Mold Wizard parting elements:

1. Cavity Block
2. Cavity Trim Sheet
3. Product Model
9 4. Core Trim Sheet
5. Core Block

9-20 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Trim-based parting process


The trim-based parting process involves the following steps:
1. Confirm product model readiness.
a. Use the Region Analysis command to confirm that the product model
is:
• Oriented and positioned to the mold draw-direction.

• Moldable, with proper draft or mold taper for mold release.

• Designed with shut-off features considered

• Designed with reasonable parting lines

b. Use Workpiece Wireframe display in the Parting Navigator to verify


that the product is contained within the workpiece.

2. Create cavity and core bodies


a. When you initialize a project, the parting part contains four key pieces
of geometry as shown in the following graphic.
• A — A workpiece — this body can be linked if the assembly
template includes a separate workpiece part. The workpiece is the
parent of linked bodies in the cavity and core parts.

• B — A linked copy of the shrink part.

• (Not illustrated) — Two seed sheets. One seed sheet is the parent
of a linked trim sheet in the cavity part, and the other is the parent
of a trim sheet in the core part. The cavity and core trim features
are suppressed in the template parts. They are unsuppressed when
you define the necessary geometry to complete the trim operations.

b. Create a set of parting and patch surfaces. When you use Mold Wizard
commands, these sheets are automatically duplicated to be combined
with sets of cavity and core trim sheets.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-21


Partings

• A — Parting surfaces.

• B — Patch surfaces.

c. Identify the areas of the model that are formed within each major half
of the mold. The faces for each half are extracted and combined with
sets of cavity and core trim sheets.

In Mold Wizard the two halves are called the core and cavity.

• A — Cavity, fixed half, or cover half.

• B — Core, or moving half.

d. One set of parting and patch faces is combined with the cavity region
faces, and another set is combined with the core region faces.

The parting and patch surfaces are both optional.


9 If there are no interior holes in the product model, you need no
patch sheets.
If you create a large enough free form sheet or enlarge a surface
from the model to use as a parting, you typically identify it as a
patch sheet and, in that case, you need not create parting sheets.

9-22 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

e. When you create the cavity and core, the combined cavity region and
cavity seed sheet are mutually trimmed and sewn together. The same
process is applied to the core sheets.
Since the seed sheets lie on datum planes that are virtually
coplanar with faces of the workpiece, and because the sewn
sheets are used to trim the workpiece, it is critical that you
construct the parting faces to extend at least to the vertical
workpiece faces, or safely beyond them.

• A — Cavity seed sheet

• B — Cavity seed sheet datum plane

When the sheets are sewn, the linked sheets in the cavity and core
parts are updated. The sheets can now, if properly constructed, be
used trim the linked cavity and core blocks.
The last step the software performs as you create the cavity and core
is to unsuppress the cavity and core trim features.

• A — Cavity trim sheet and cavity block with unsuppressed trim


feature.

9
This method is applicable to both solid models and surface models.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-23


Partings

Mold Wizard parting terminology

Patch sheets
Patch sheets can be:
• Surfaces within an interior boundary, such as a hole in the product model.

• Surfaces to fill open loops, such as notches adjacent to the main parting
surface.

It is recommended that you complete patch sheets before you create parting
sheets.
When you create patch sheets, you shut off internal openings with appropriate
geometry to seal openings against the molded plastic or metal. These sheets
are also called shut-off sheets.
The Mold Wizard application has both solid and surface-based methods to
shut off openings. You can also include NX free form surfaces as shut off
or parting sheets.

Regions
The Define Regions command identifies cavity and core faces and extracts a
region sheet for each. The extracted regions, patch sheets, and parting sheets
are used to trim the cavity and core bodies.
If there are crossover faces or faces that have areas in both the cavity
and the core, you must split them into cavity and core faces.
If there are regions for which you will create a slide or lifter, you can do
one of the following:
• Assign the region to the half to which the moving piece is attached.
This assures that a closed loop of parting edges exists.

• Define a separate region feature for the faces of the moving piece.

Parting lines
The parting lines are the extracted edges that delimit the cavity and core
regions. You can use the parting edges, sometimes in conjunction with guide
9 lines, to define various types of parting surfaces.

9-24 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Guide lines and transition points


You can divide the parting loop into segments, where each segment is used to
define a parting surface. The segments are delimited by the location of guide
lines. Transition points are created automatically at the points where guide
lines intersect with parting lines. You can use guide lines as sweep rails or
trim lines for parting sheets. You can select the transition points if you need
to define a transition sheet that touches the parting loop at that point.

Parting surfaces
Parting surfaces are sheet bodies created adjacent to parting line segments.
Parting sheet bodies must extend beyond the workpiece, or the solid body that
represents the cavity or core steel.
The software calculates a list of possible surface types that can be defined by
each string of parting curves between two guide lines, and presents a list
of surface creation methods in a dialog box. The list can include creation
methods such as:
• Extrude

• Swept

• Bounded Plane

• Enlarged Surface

• Ribbon Surface

• Trim and Extend

You can accept one of the proposed methods, or create a sheet body using
modeling commands.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-25


Partings

Parting components
When you initialize a project, the Mold Wizard software copies one of several
template assemblies. The details of the parting process vary depending which
structure you use; however, the parting process is the same for each template.

Assembly structure
The assembly structure represented in the following table shows the
component relationships for the Default and Mold.V1 configurations.
Mold.V1 Original
product product
workpiece original product
parting-set shrink
original product parting
parting core
shrink cavity
molding trim
core molding
cavity prod_side_a
trim prod_side_b
prod_side_a
prod_side_b

In the Mold.V1 configuration, the *_parting-set subassembly is used in


conjunction with the Mold CSYS command to provide a robust update
capability, even if you change the parting plane after the cavity and
core are defined.

9-26 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Parting related part files

The *_prod or product subassembly part contains all of the geometry you
need to create cavity and core models. Family molds have a separate product
subassembly for each family member.
The following parts are related to parting commands used to complete the
cavity and core models.
The parts are described in the order of their WAVE linked hierarchy.
Original product — You can make the product model read-only to protect it
from accidental changes.

The product model file is placed as a child component of :


• The *_prod subassembly if it contains a part with the attribute
MW_PARTING_SET, for example the Mold.V1 configuration template.

• The *_parting-set subassembly if no part has the MW_PARTING_SET,


for example the Original configuration template.

Molding — The molding part file, *_molding, contains a geometry-linked


copy of the original product model. The geometry link exists in the template
assembly and is automatically updated when you initialize a project.

In the molding part, you can add molding features such as tapers, split faces,
and blends to make the product moldable. The advantages of adding molding
features in molding part are:
• The molding part is before the shrink (scale feature) part in the hierarchy.
Axis-symmetric or general scale, if you use them, are reflected properly
in your corrective features.

• When you swap the product for a newer version (Parting → Swap Product
Model) full association of your corrective features is maintained. This is
true even if the original product is translated from another CAD system.

Shrink — The *_shrink part file contains a geometry-linked copy of the body
in the molding part file. The geometry link exists in the template assembly
and is automatically updated when you initialize a project.

The linked body has a scale feature with a default value of 1.0. You can 9
update the scale feature by:
• Specifying a material when you initialize the project.

• Using the Shrinkage command any time after initialization.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-27


Partings

Parting — As you define a parting, the *_parting part holds the geometry
necessary to trim a workpiece into cavity and core halves.

Although the parting definition process is the same, the underlying modeling
methods and the features in the part vary between the Mold.V1 and Original
templates.

The template parting parts in the Mold.V1 and Original configurations


contain:
• A workpiece body that becomes the parent of the trimmed cavity and
core bodies.

The template parting part in the Mold.V1 configuration also contains:


• A linked datum coordinate system that is used to support robust mold
coordinate system updates.

The template parting part in the Original configuration also contains:


• Seed geometry that is used the create parent bodies for trim sheets and
solids in the cavity and core parts.

Cavity and core parts — The *_cavity and *_core parts have similar features.
Each part contains:
• A solid body linked to the defined workpiece.

• A sheet body with which a solid body is trimmed to form the cavity or
core insert body.

• A trim feature that is suppressed in the template parts and unsuppressed


when you define the cavity or core.

9-28 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Cavity and core parting trim results


The parting commands might result in a sheet body in the cavity or core,
or both.
1. When cavity or core trim is successful, the process is complete and results
in a solid body.

2. When a cavity or core trim fails, the geometry-linked sheet in the


component is trimmed to the size of the work piece.

For example, a product model has good geometry on the cavity side but
has geometry quality problems in the faces that form the core. In thos
case, a solid cavity is produced and a sheet-body core is produced.

Parting status expressions


The parting part contains four expressions to control the trim and suppression
status of the cavity and core. These parameters are not intended to be
adjusted.
• split_cavity_supp

• split_core_supp

• split_cavity_trim

• split_core_trim

Create Extract Region Status


The extracted regions are successfully created, the split_cavity_supp and
split_core_supp expression values are set to 1.
If at any future time the extractions are repeated and not successful, the
split_cavity_supp and split_core_supp expressions are set to 0.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-29


Partings

Create Cavity/Core Status


If the trim of the cavity or core body is successful, the value for
split_cavity_trim or split_core_trim is set to 0.
If a cavity or core trim is not successful, the geometry linked region is
trimmed to the work piece size, and the value for split_cavity_trim or
split_core_trim is set to 1.
If trimming the region to the work piece size fails, the value for
split_cavity_trim or split_core_trim is set to 2.
Expression Create Create Linked Linked
Name Extract Cavity/Core Sheet Sheet Not
Region Status Trimmed Trimmed
Status
split_cavity_supp 0 1 1 1
split_core_supp 0 1 1 1
split_cavity_trim 0 0 1 2
split_core_trim 0 0 1 2

9-30 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Parting tools overview


The mold parting tools consist of the following:
• The Parting Navigator.

• The Mold Parting Tools toolbar.

Application Mold Wizard


Toolbar
Mold Wizard®Mold Parting Tools
Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Parting Tools

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-31


Partings

Parting Navigator overview


Use the Parting Navigator window to:
• Determine the current parting geometry.

• Control the visibility and layer of parting objects.

Parting Navigator columns


Parting Objects — Contains the check boxes, node icons, and the descriptive
text for each node.
Count — Displays a count of objects under a collecting node.
Layer — Displays the layer assigned to objects under a collecting node.
ID — Displays the object identifier for individual pieces of geometry.

9-32 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Split Face overview


Use the Split Face command to split faces that lie across the parting surface.
To define cavity and core trim regions, it is essential that no face has
areas on both sides of the parting sheets.

As splitting geometry, you can use:


• Isocline curves

• Datum planes

• Curves

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Split Face


Mold Wizard®Mold Parting Tools®Region
Toolbar Analysis®Face page®Face Split
Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold
Menu Tools®Split Face

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-33


Partings

Split faces by isocline


Typically, operations that change the customer supplied model should be
done in the modeling component, so that work is not lost if your customer
revises your original molded part.
In this example, the product part was analyzed using the Molded Part
Validation command. The final adjustments are going to slightly change
the model. The product faces were colored to make the needed adjustments
visually identifiable, and the linked body in the molding component part,
shown in the graphics, inherited the same colors.

1. On the Tools toolbar, click Split Face .

2. In the Split Face dialog box, in the Type group, select Isocline .
to use this method, you must have faces that cross over their natural
parting line. You can select only faces that the Molded Part Validation or
Region Analysis commands would identify as Crossover Region Faces.
In the following graphic, two faces in the opening is identified as
Crossover Region Faces.

3. With Select Face active in the Face to Divide group, select faces to split.

9-34 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Isocline curves are created automatically on selected faces.

If you deselect a face, the corresponding isocline curves are deleted.

4. Click OK or Apply.
Remember to use the Molded Part Validation or Region Analysis
command to identify the region to which new faces belong.
To complete the operations on the example part, you also need to split
some faces by a datum plane, and then modify draft. The next example
shows the required operations.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-35


Partings

Split faces by datum plane


The procedures to split faces by existing or new curves, datum planes, or
intersections are virtually identical.
The Molded Part Validation command’s analysis shows that this part has
undercut areas. The undercuts appear after unknown faces from the previous
example are split by icocline curves.
The two following graphics show the highlighting shown by selecting the
Undercut Areas and Undercut Edges check boxes, respectively.

This example shows how to split undercut areas with a new datum plane,
based on the position of the undercut edges, so that you can apply proper
draft to the new faces.

9 1. On the Tools toolbar, click Split Face .

2. In the Split Face dialog box, in the Type group, select Plane/Face .

3. With Select Face active in the Face to Divide group, select faces to split.

9-36 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

4. Click Add Datum Plane to define a new plane.


a. In the Datum Plane dialog box, in the Type group, set the method to
define your datum plane.
In the example, we used the default method, Inferred, and selected the
axes of two blend faces that were split in the previous example.

You can also select split edges if they are linear edges.

b. When the datum plane is fully specified and the preview is satisfactory,
click OK.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-37


Partings

Splitting geometry that you create by an Add method is not deleted


if you deselect it.

You can also select an existing planar face or datum plane.

5. In the Split Face dialog box, click OK or Apply.

After you correct the draft, remember to use the Molded Part Validation or
Region Analysis command to redo the analysis in the parting part.
With a complex part that takes a long time to analyze, you can keep the
existing analysis and manually assign the new faces to the appropriate core
or cavity region, as shown in the following graphic.

9-38 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Split Face dialog box


Type
Divides selected faces by curves or
edges.
Curves/Edges
Divides selected faces by a datum
plane.
Plane/Face
Divides selected faces at intersection
curves.
Intersection
You can select only faces that are
identified as Crossover Region
Faces in the Molded Part Validation
Isocline
dialog box.
Divides selected faces at the
automatically constructed
zero-degree isocline curves.
The isocline curves are deleted if you
deselect their parent face.
A zero-degree icocline is a curve
internal to a face for which,
at all points on the curve, a
draw-direction-parallel vector
though the point is tangent to
the face.
Dividing Objects

Appears when Type is set to anything other than Isocline.


Geometry added by methods in this group is not deleted if you deselect it
as a dividing object.
Appears when the Type is set to
Curves/Edges.
Add Line Opens the Line dialog box.
Appears when the Type is set to
Plane/Face. 9
Add Datum Plane Opens the Datum Plane dialog box.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-39


Partings

Appears when the Type is set to


Intersection.
Add Intersection Curve Opens the Intersection Curve dialog
box.
Setting

Tolerance Sets the modeling tolerance used for:


• Geometry construction

• Dividing the face

9-40 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Patch Surfaces overview


You can use the Patch Surface command to automatically find and patch all
internal loops in the product.
There are three methods to search for internal loops:
• Auto Hole Patch — Finds loops on the parting body when the cavity and
core regions have not been defined.

• Edge Patch — Finds parting line loops on openings with edges that cross
multiple faces and uses these loops create patch surfaces.

• Surface Patch — Finds parting line loops on openings with edges that
are fully contained within a single face and uses these loops to create
patch surfaces.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Mold Parting Tools®Patch Surfaces


Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Parting
Menu Tools®Patch Surfaces

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-41


Partings

Patch Surface/Edge Patch dialog box

9-42 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Edge Patch dialog box


Loop Selection
Type
Face
Filters selection to only faces with un-patched interior
edge loops.

Body
Filters selection to only bodies with un-patched edge loops.

Traverse
Displays the Traverse options so you can select edges and
curves.
Traverse Loop

Available when Type is set to Traverse.


Loop List
Select Loop Lets you select un-patched loops of edges.
List Shows the currently selected loops. You can select loops in
the list to highlight or remove them.
Select Displays automatically selected reference faces, and lets
Reference Face you change the selection.
Switch Face Changes the reference faces to the faces on the opposite
Side side of a selected loop of edges.
Settings
As Patch When the check box is cleared, only one face is created.
Surface Use this option when you want to do further editing on the
sheet before you identify it as a patch sheet.
When the check box is selected, the original sheet is moved
to the hidden object layer, and copies are made in the core
and cavity layers.
Patch Color Lets you specify a color for both patch sheets.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-43


Partings

Patch Surfaces related topics


Q. Why does the Patch Surfaces command fail?
A.
• Check the setting in the assemblies general customer defaults, on the
Interpart Modeling page. In the Allow Associative Interpart Modeling
group, you must select Yes.

• Ensure that the original product part file is fully loaded. When you patch
more than two faces, the software must be able to access the parent
feature(s) of the opening. This information exists only in the original
product part model, and it can be accessed only when that part is fully
loaded.

Alternate patch methods


• Some loops cannot be patched up by the Surface Patch or Edge Patch
commands used by the Patch Surfaces command.

• If you recognize loops that is unlikely to be patched properly, deselect


them before you click Patch Surfaces.
Later, you can use the Solid Patch or Trim Region Patch command to
construct the required patch.

• If you have patches for complex openings that you created using modeling
commands, you can save time by converting them to patch surfaces as you
create automatic patches.
Click As Patch Surface and select your sheets to immediately convert
them to patch sets.

Tips
• If the product is complex, it might take a long time to find parting lines
and patch loops automatically.
You can use the Traverse Loop command to manually identify these loops
for parting, or the Edge Patch command to patch them for shuf-offs.

• If all parting lines are on the same non-planar face, you can use the
9 Enlarge Surface command to create a parting surface.

9-44 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Activity
In the Partings section, do the following activity:
• Face Split and Assign to Region

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-45


Partings

Define Regions overview


Use the Define Regions command to create:
• Cavity and core region sheets, extracted region features containing all of
the cavity and core faces you identified in the Molded Part Validation
dialog box.

• Parting lines, extracted from the outer loop of edges that bound the cavity
and core regions.

• Other region sheets, as many as you require to trim slides and lifters.

Where do I find it?


Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Mold Parting Tools®Define Regions

9-46 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Create cavity and core regions and parting lines

1. On the Mold Parting Tools toolbar, click Define Regions .

2. In the Define Regions dialog box, in the Define Regions group, examine
the face counts for Undefined Faces, Cavity region, and Core region.
If the face count for undefined faces is other than zero, as shown in
the following figures, you should verify that all important faces are
identified as cavity or core faces.
Faces that you intend to identify to sweep or extrude a slide or lifter
head need not be identified as core or cavity faces; however, it does
not present any problems if you do identify them.
Region Name Count Region Name Count
All Faces 372 All Faces 372
Undefined Faces 372 Undefined Faces 12
Cavity region 0 Cavity region 200
Core region 0 Core region 160
New region 0 New region 0

The following figure shows the appearance of the region list when all
faces are identified as cavity and core faces. The icon for undefined
faces changes to reflect there are no undefined faces in this part.
Region Name Count
All Faces 372
Undefined Faces 0
Cavity region 200
Core region 172
New region 0

3. (Optional) In the Face Properties group, use the slider to change the
transparency of selected or non-selected faces.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-47


Partings

This can help you to:


• Determine the location of undefined faces.

• Visualize other problems.

4. In the settings group, select one or both options:


• Create Regions

• Create Parting Lines

5. Click OK or Apply.
The icons in the list in the Define Regions group reflect the status
of successfully extracted regions.

Region Name Count


All Faces 372
Undefined Faces 0
Cavity region 200
Core region 172
New region 0

9-48 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Define new regions


You can define region sheets other than the cavity and core regions. For
example, you can create parting lines to extrude a slide head and a sheet
body to trim it to the part contour.

1. On the Mold Parting Tools toolbar, click Define Regions .

2. In the Define Regions dialog box, in the Define Regions group, in the
region list, if there is no entry named New Region, click Create New

Region .

3. Click the words New Region.

4. In the box, enter a unique descriptive name for the region.


Region Name Count
All Faces 372
Undefined Faces 0
Cavity region 200
Core region 172
XXX slide 0

5. With the new region selected in the list, do one of the following:

• Click Select Region Faces to select individual faces.

• Click Search Region to use the seed and boundary face method.

6. Click Apply to create the extracted region sheet.


Sheets cannot belong to two regions. For example, in the following
figure, the sheets selected for the slide are removed from the cavity.

Region Name Count


All Faces 372
Undefined Faces 0 9
Cavity region 194
Core region 172
XXX slide 6
New Region

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-49


Partings

7. (Optional) With the new region selected in the list, in the Face Properties
group, click the Color swatch to choose a color for the faces in the new
region, and then click Apply.

The following figure shows the parting lines associated with the three
regions.

9-50 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Define regions by seed and boundary faces


1. In the Define Regions dialog box, select a region from the list.

2. Click Search Region .

3. In the Search Region dialog box, if necessary, click Select Seed Faces

4. Select one or more seed faces.


Seed faces are faces within the region you are identifying.
After you select a seed face, the maximum value of the slider shows
the total number of connected faces.
The region will contain all of the connected faces, unless you define
edges to confine it to the area surrounding the seed faces.

5. Click Select Boundary Edges.

6. (Optional) Move the slider to verify that all connected faces will be added
to the region. Return the slider to zero.

7. Select edges to bound the region you are defining.


As you select, open ends are identified automatically.
When you select a complete boundary loop, the maximum value of
the slider changes to show the new total number of connected faces.

8. (Optional) Move the slider to verify the faces that will be added to the
region.

9. Click OK.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-51


Partings

Define Regions dialog box


Define Regions
list Shows the counts of:
• All faces

• Undefined faces

• Defined regions

Indicates the status of each region by icons:

Used for undefined faces when the count is greater than zero, and
for empty regions.

Used for defined regions that have not been extracted

Used for extracted regions and for undefined faces when the count
is zero.

You can right-click any user defined region and choose delete.

Adds an empty new region to the list.

Create New
Region
Selects faces and adds them to the selected region.

Select Region
Faces
Opens the Search Region dialog box.

Search Region

9-52 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Settings
Create When selected, create or delete and recreate the selected regions when
Regions you click OK or Apply.
Create Parting When selected, create parting lines when you click OK or Apply.
Lines
Face Properties
Color Opens the Color dialog box where you can set a face color for the selected
region.
Translucency Selected Faces — Sets the focus of the translucency slider to selected
Option faces.
Other Faces — Sets the focus of the translucency slider to all faces that
are not currently selected.
slider Changes the translucency of the faces indicated by the Translucency
Option.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-53


Partings

Search Regions dialog box


Search Region
Lets you select one face to act as
the seed face for the region you are
defining.
Select Seed Faces
Lets you select edges to limit the
number of faces in the region.
Select Boundary Edges
Lets you select faces to limit the
number of faces in the region.
Select Boundary Faces
Highlight Faces Highlights faces that belong to the
region as you move the slider.
The slider shows the count of faces in
the region when you move it all the
way to the right.
Settings

Translucency as Boundary Faces When selected, the region boundary is


automatically defined by translucent
faces.
The faces must be more than 50
percent translucent to be identified
as boundary faces.
Different Colors as Boundary Faces When selected, the region is limited
by any faces that have a different
color than the seed face.
Max Number of Faces Searched Initially, displays the total face count
of the parting body.
If you reduce the number, the
specified number of faces is selected
and selection halts.
Boundary Faces Color Changes selected boundary faces to
the specified color when you click OK
or Apply.
9

9-54 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Seed and boundary faces


A seed face is the initial face of a region of faces when you are defining a
region feature. The software selects all faces that connect to the seed face,
until a boundary face or edge is reached.
A boundary face is a face that you can select to limit the size of a region
feature. As the software finds connected faces for the region, it is not allowed
to select across the edge of a boundary face.
You can select boundary edges when this is easier than selecting boundary
faces.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-55


Partings

Activity
In the Partings section, do the following activity:
• Extract Regions

9-56 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Design Parting Surface overview


Use the Design Parting Surface command to:
• Create or delete a parting surface for a selected parting loop segment.

• Identify and edit parting curves and edges.

• Create and edit guide lines.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard


Mold Wizard®Parting®Mold Parting Tools®Design

Toolbar Parting Surface


Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Parting
Menu Tools®Design Parting Surface

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-57


Partings

Traverse Parting Lines overview


Use the Traverse Parting Lines command to
• Specify the tolerance within which curves are considered connected.

• Select and open or closed loop of curves and edges and identify them as
parting lines.

Select a closed loop of curves and edges

Where do I find it?


Application Mold Wizard
The Design Parting Surface dialog box must be open
9 Prerequisite to use this command.
Mold Wizard®Mold Parting Tools®Design Parting

Toolbar Surface
Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Parting
Menu Tools®Design Parting Surface

9-58 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Location in dialog
box Edit Parting Lines group®Traverse Parting Lines

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-59


Partings

Guide Lines

Use the Select Parting or Guide Line option on the Design Parting
Surface dialog box to create guide lines and perform common edits.

Use the Edit Guide Lines option on the Design Parting Surface dialog
box to create guide lines and access the complete set of editing options.
You can use guide lines to:
• Identify segments of the parting loop that can be used to define different
parting surfaces.

• Determine the direction for an extruded parting surface.

• Use as rails for a swept parting surface.

• Use as trim curves for other types of parting surfaces.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard


The Design Parting Surface dialog box must be open
Prerequisite to use this command.
Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Parting
Menu Tools®Design Parting Surface
Mold Wizard®Mold Parting Tools®Design Parting

Toolbar Surface
Edit Parting Segments group®Select Parting or Guide

Line
Location in dialog
box Edit Parting Segments group®Edit Guide Lines

9-60 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Simple guide line creation and editing


1. In the Design Parting Surface dialog box, in the Edit Parting Segments

group, click Select Parting or Guide Line .

2. Move the cursor over the parting loop until the curve on which you want
to create a guide line is highlighted and the red indicator appears at the
end where you want the guide line. (A blue indicator appears at the
opposite end of the curve.)

Parting segment
Cursor
Red arrow
Blue arrow

3. Click to create the guide line.

4. (Optional) Right-click the guide line just created while it remains selected,
and select one of the three standard directions, or select Delete if the
line is not satisfactory.

5. Repeat the preceding steps until you create all the guide lines you need.

6. Click Apply or OK.

If you want continuous control over the length and direction of guide
lines, or if you want to delete all of the existing lines, click Edit Guide

Lines at any time.


9

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-61


Partings

Auto Create Guide Lines


1. In the Design Parting Surface dialog box, in the Edit Parting Segments

group, click Edit Guide Lines .

2. (Optional) In the Guide Line dialog box, in the Guide Line group, in the
Guide Line Length box, type a length for the guide lines.

3. (Optional) From the Direction list, select a direction for the guide lines, or
click Specify Vector to specify a direction.

4. Click Auto Create Guide Lines .

5. In the Highlight Parting Segments group, select each segment one at a


time to verify that the segments are acceptable.

6. Click OK.

7. In the Design Parting Surface dialog box, click Apply or OK.

9-62 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Create and edit guide lines


1. In the Design Parting Surface dialog box, in the Edit Parting Segments

group, click Edit Guide Lines .

2. (Optional) For each guide line, in the Guide Line dialog box, in the Guide
Line group, in the Guide Line Length box, type a length for the guide line.

3. (Optional) From the Direction list, select a standard direction for the
guide line, or select Vector to specify any direction.

4. Move the cursor over the parting loop until the curve on which you want
to create a guide line is highlighted and the red indicator appears at the
end where you want the guide line. (A blue indicator appears at the
opposite end of the curve.)

Parting segment
Cursor
Red arrow
Blue arrow

5. Click to create the guide line.

6. (Optional) Right-click the guide line just created while it remains selected,
and select one of the three standard directions, or select Delete if the
line is not satisfactory.

7. Repeat the preceding steps until you create all the guide lines you need.

8. (Optional) In the Highlight Parting Segments group, select each segment 9


one at a time to verify that the segments are acceptable.

9. Click OK.

10. In the Design Parting Surface dialog box, click Apply or OK.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-63


Partings

Guide Line dialog box


Guide Line
Lets you select curves or edges, including existing guide lines.

Select Parting or
Guide Line
Guide Line Length Sets the length used for guide lines that you are about to create.
Direction Specifies one of the standard direction options:
Normal
Orients the guide line to perpendicular to the parent parting
curve at the end point, and parallel to the parting plane.
Tangential
Orients the guide line to tangent to the parent parting curve at
the end point, and parallel to the parting plane.
Snap to WCS Axis
Snaps the guide line to be parallel to the nearest WCS axis that
lies within the Snap Angle Limit set in the Guide Line dialog box.

The preceding options also appear in the shortcut menu for guidelines
selected with the Select Parting or Guide Line option.
Vector Opens the Vector dialog box where you can
specify any direction.
Edit Guide Line
Deletes a single selected guide line.
This option also appears in the shortcut menu for a guideline selected
Delete Selected with the Select Parting or Guide Line option active.
Guide Line
Deletes all guide lines for the active product.

Delete All Guide


Lines
Determines guide line locations for the active product by a software
algorithm and places them according to the current Guide Line
9 Auto Create Guide
Length and Direction settings.
Lines
Highlight Parting Segments

9-64 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

list Shows the current number of segments in the parting loop of the
active product, and the count of curves or edges in each segment.
Highlights (selects) segments one at a time as you select rows in
the list.
Settings
Snap Angle Limit Sets the tolerance angle used by the Snap to WCS Axis option in
the Direction list.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-65


Partings

Activity
In the Partings section, do the following activity:
• Create guide lines

9-66 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Design Parting Surface dialog box


The following figure shows the primary configurations.

You might also see Auto Surface and Bridge types when you:
• Edit legacy transition surfaces.
• Create transition surfaces at points. 9

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-67


Partings

Design parting surfaces process

1. On the Mold Parting Tools toolbar, click Design Parting Surface .

2. (Optional) In the Design Parting Surface dialog box, in the Settings


group, in the Tolerance box, type a modeling tolerance to be used in
surface creation and sewing.
In the Parting Lines group, the Select Parting Lines option is active.
If there are one or more parting segments for which a surface does not
exist, a segment is highlighted in the Parting Segments list.
If you prefer to process a segment other than the one highlighted, select
the segment you want to process.

3. In the Create Parting Surface group, under Method, select the type of
surface that you want to create for the highlighted segment.
There are one or more options in the Create Parting Surface group,
depending on the type of surface that you select.

4. Specify options that apply to the surface type you selected, or accept the
default values.

5. If there are multiple segments to process, click Apply.


In the Parting Segments list, the status icon for the segment changes
from to .
The next segment in the list is automatically selected.
If the parting sheet is not acceptable, or if you wish to try another type, in
the Parting Segments list, delete the sheet by clicking in the Delete
Parting Surface column for the corresponding segment.

6. Continue to design surfaces for any remaining segments, and click OK


when you are finished.

9-68 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Create a surface at a transition object

1. On the Mold Parting Tools toolbar, click Design Parting Surface .


Transition segments and points are colored differently from parting lines.

Parting segments
Transition segment
Guide line
Parting sheets

2. Select a transition point or segment for which a surface does not exist.
The Transition Parting Surface group appears with options for the surface
types that are valid at the selected location.

3. Under Transition Parting Surface Type, select the type of surface that you
wish to create.

4. Click Select Primary Edges.


If the two edges that you want to use are not automatically selected,
deselect the automatic selection and select the edges.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-69


Partings

Transition segment
Primary edges

5. Click Apply.
You can select the segment again and change the options. When you click
Apply, you are asked to confirm deleting the exiting sheet.

9-70 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Design Parting Surface dialog box


Parting Lines
Lets you select existing curve segments that are identified in
the list, or a transition point.
Select Parting
Lines
Parting Displays information about existing parting segments in
Segments three columns.
Parting Segments
Identifies the segments by a sequence number. Status
icons show whether the corresponding surface exists
or does not yet exist .
Delete Parting Surface
Deletes the parting sheet for any row when you click .
Parting Lines Count
Displays the number of curves in each segment.

You can right-click a row that has an existing sheet and


choose Delete Parting Surface to remove the sheet that
corresponds to the selected segment.
Create Parting Surface

Displays:
• Surface construction methods that are applicable to the currently
selected parting segment.

• Appropriate options for the selected surface construction method.


Method Lets you set the surface construction method for the selected
segment.

Extrude
Extrudes the selected curves in a single, linear direction
for a specified distance. You can specify a draft angle for
the surface you are creating.
9
Swept
Sweeps the selected segment along two guide lines. The
lines are defined by the extend distance and each of two
directions that you specify.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-71


Partings

Non-planar segments must be smooth and contiguous.


distance handle

Bounded Plane
Available when the selected segment consists of coplanar
curves.
Creates a bounded plane in the plane of the segment.
The plane is trimmed by the segment and the two guide
lines.
You have the option to accept the initial trim sheet or flip
the side of the guide lines that is trimmed.

Enlarged Surface
Available when there are one or more faces adjacent to
the selected loop that can be enlarged.
Enlarges a face that is adjacent to the segment by a
percentage of the size of the minimum sheet that fits the
segment, and trims it to the selected segment and the
guide lines.

Trim and Extend


Extends the faces adjacent to the selected segment
following their natural curvature for a specified distance.
The segment is used as a trim boundary. Guide lines, if
created manually, can also be used as trim boundaries.

Ribbon Surface
Creates a surface that is:
• Generally perpendicular to the draw direction. and
extending

• Anchored at the parting segment.


9
• Extending away from the parting body by the
specified distance.

The sheet body is constructed using the Ribbon Builder


command in the Modeling application, but with typical
parameters for parting sheets set automatically .

9-72 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Extrude Lets you:


Direction,
• Select a standard vector direction from the list.
First
Direction,
and Second • Use the OrientXpress tool.
Direction
• Click to specify a vector.

• Click Reverse Direction .


Resize All When selected, all the handles expand the surface by the
Directions same percentage of its minimum size.
Enlarge Other When the selected loop is adjacent to two sets of faces,
Face switches the enlarged surface parent face between the two
possible faces.
Trim and Lets you specify the core or cavity region of faces adjacent to
Extend From the selected parting segment to extend and trim.
Trim with When selected, the surface is trimmed to the guide lines and
Guide Lines the selected segment.
To use this option, you must use the options in the Edit
Parting Segments group to create appropriate guide lines at
the ends of the selected segment .
When cleared (default), the surface is trimmed only to the
selected segment.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-73


Partings

Transition Parting Surface

Usually, transition surfaces are constructed automatically as soon as


the two adjacent sheets are finished.

This group appears when you select a transition point or a transition curve
while Select Parting Lines is active.
Select Lets you select edges to control the position of the transition
Primary sheet edges. Usually this is automatic.
Edges
The transition sheet, depending on the type, is tangent or
nearly tangent to the sheet whose edge you select.
Transition
Parting Auto
Surface Type The software attempts to construct each of the following
transition surface types and stops when it succeeds.

Bounded Plane
Constructs a bounded plane and trims it to the transition
segment and the two primary edges.

Swept
Constructs a swept sheet using the transition segment and
the two primary edges.

Bridge
Creates a bridge between the primary edges, using the
transition segment as one side edge. The segment must be
tangent continuous internally, and tangent to the adjacent
segments.
Alternate When selected:
Method
• Swept surface uses the transition curve string as the
sweep section, and the two guide lines as guide strings.

When cleared:
• Swept surface uses the transition curve string as the
guide string, and the two guide lines as sweep sections.
9

9-74 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Edit Parting Lines

Options in this group let you identify new parting lines or remove existing
parting lines.
When active, existing parting curves are highlighted.
Lets you select or deselect curves and edges.
Select Parting
Lines When you click Apply, selected curves are identified
as parting curves by adding them to the group
UM_PARTING_LINES, and deselected curves are removed
from the group.
Opens the Traverse Parting Lines dialog box which has
options that you can use to select a series of connected curves
and edges.
Traverse
Parting Lines
Edit Parting Segments

Options in this group let you change the way the parting loop is subdivided
into segments. Each segment is used to generate a separate parting sheet.
Select Parting Creates a guide line perpendicular to the nearest end point
or Guide Line of a parting line when you click the line.
Enables a shortcut menu for a guide curve after you select it.
For additional options to edit guide lines, click Edit Guide

Lines .
Select When active, all transition curves are highlighted.
Transition
Curves Lets you select or deselect curves. When you click Apply,
selected curves get the attribute MW_GUIDE_LINES and
deselected lines have the attribute removed.
Edit Guide Opens the Guide Line dialog box.
Lines
The dialog box has robust methods to create and edit guide
lines.
Settings

Tolerance Sets the modeling tolerance for surface construction and


extracting parting curves in the Design Parting Surface
dialog box.
Parting Sets an expression for the relative size of all parting surfaces.
Surface 9
Length If you change the value, the extended length for all parting
surfaces, whether it is a distance or a percent, changes in
equal proportion.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-75


Partings

Parting surface related topics

Use the Edit Parting and Patch Surface command to:


• Identify surfaces that you create in the Modeling application as parting
sheets.

• Remove existing parting sheets.

9-76 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Activity
In the Partings section, do the following activity:
• Create parting surfaces

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-77


Partings

Define Cavity and Core overview


You can use the Define Cavity and Core command to:
• Create trimming sheets for the cavity, core, and any new regions you
defined.

• Suppress the existing parting so you can define new trimming sheets.

• Trim the cavity and core bodies with the cavity and core trimming sheets,
respectively.

• Create a new component and trimmed body for any new regions you
created.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard


Mold Wizard®Mold Parting Tools®Define Cavity and

Toolbar Core
Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Parting
Menu Tools®Define Cavity and Core

9-78 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Create tooling trimmed bodies one by one

1. On the Mold Parting Tools toolbar, click Define Cavity and Core .

2. In the Define Cavity and Core dialog box, in the Select Sheets group,
from the list, select the region for which you want to create a trim sheet
and trim a body.

3. Review the highlighted sheets. You can:


• Select sheet bodies to add to the current region only.

• Deselect highlighted sheets to remove them from the region.

4. Click OK or Apply to process the selected sheets.


In processing:
• The parting and region sheets are sewn together.

• The sewn sheet is trimmed to the seed sheet.

• The seed sheet is trimmed to the sewn parting sheet.

• The sewn parting sheet is sewn as the tool sheet to the seed
sheet as target body.

• The linked trim sheet and workpiece body for the region are
updated.

• The trim feature in the component part corresponding to the


region is unsuppressed.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-79


Partings

Define Cavity and Core dialog box


Select Sheets
Region Name list Lets you select All Regions or any individual region to process.
Available when an individual region is selected in the Region
Name list.
Select Sheets Lets you select sheet bodies to add to the region, or deselect sheets
to remove them from the region.

Suppress
Suppresses the trim features in the cavity, core, and any other
Suppress trimmed parts that you defined.
Parting
When the parting is suppressed, you can make changes
without causing update failures.
To unsuppress the parting, process all of the regions.
Settings
No Interaction When selected, the process is completed with no further
Queries interaction. For example, the view parting result dialog box does
not appear.
Sew Tolerance Specifies the tolerance at which adjacent edges are considered to
coincide.

9-80 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Suggestions to resolve parting problems


In some cases, creating the cavity and core may not succeed. Here are some
procedures to help find and solve the problem.
Problem Solution
There are internal • Increase tolerance value in the Define Cavity and Core dialog
highlighted box, then try again.
boundaries after
sewing. • Check the highlighted area to see if it is patched.

• Check if the region boundary is correct.


Fail to trim seed Check work piece and all surfaces to see whether the trimming
sheet. sheet or work piece is large enough.
Cannot sew surfaces Try to find overlapping parting surfaces.
together.
Some holes may be patched up twice.
Use the NX sew feature to sew them manually.
Lost some patch Check whether some sheet bodies are in invisible layers.
surfaces.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-81


Partings

Activities
In the Partings section, do the following activities:
• Define the cavity, core, and slide

• User defined parting

9-82 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Swap Model overview


Use the Swap Model command to replace the original product model with a
new version of the model when product design changes occur during or after
the mold design process.
Association between the mold design features in the mold assembly such as
tapers, split faces, parting lines, patch surfaces, and parting surfaces are
retained, even if the product model is translated into NX from other CAD
systems.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Mold Parting Tools ®Swap Model


Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Parting
Menu Tools®Swap Model

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-83


Partings

Swap the product model for a new version


1. Load interpart data for the parting-set subassembly.
a. Make the parting-set subassembly the displayed part.

b. Choose Assemblies®WAVE®Load Interpart Data.

c. In the Load Interpart Data dialog box, in the Scope group, select All
Parts in Displayed Assembly.

d. (Optional) From the Open Unloaded Parents list, select Immediate


Level Only.
Any option for Open Unloaded Parents is acceptable.
The default action is to load None.
This temporarily leaves the original product model unloaded because
it is displaying the empty reference set; however, the Swap Model
command fully loads the product model.

e. Click OK.

2. On the Mold Parting Tools toolbar, click Swap Model .

3. In the Open dialog box, navigate to and open the new product model.

4. (Optional) In the Swap Settings dialog box, select the Compare and
Match UI check box to open the Model Comparison dialog box before the
swap takes place.
• You can use the Match page of the Model Comparison dialog box to
map faces and edges.

5. (Optional) Select the Remove Parting Features check box to delete


parting features that do not fail completely, such as invalid parting lines,
patch sheets, and parting sheets.
This saves the time you would spend cleaning up invalid geometry.

6. Click OK.
9 7. If you open the Model Comparison dialog box to map geometry:
• On the Compare tab, examine the geometry counts, set shading and
translucency, and save the colors.

• Click the Match tab.

9-84 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

• Map the faces and edges you want to be recognized as the parents of
existing features such as patch sheets.

• For each mapped geometry pair, click Apply.

• Click Back to begin the swap.

8. If the swap succeeds, you see a message asking you to make the last
feature in the feature tree the current feature. To do this:
a. Take note of any messages in the information window and close it.

b. Start the Modeling application.

c. In the Part Navigator, right-click the column heading and if necessary,


select Timestamp Order.

d. Right-click the last feature in timestamp order and choose Make


Current Feature.

e. If the Information window appears, take note of any problems, and


close the window.

f. In the Part Navigator, take note of any failed features.

g. Remove failed features and reconstruct parting features as necessary.

The Swap Model command suppresses cavity and core regions and features
such as mold component trim, slider head trim, ejector pin trim, sub insert
trim, and so on.
Some parting objects cannot be automatically added to the new model. For
example, solid patches are not united to the replacement model automatically.
You must use the Solid Patch command again.
After you complete the swap, you can see the new version of the product
model in the parting part.
The new model is a component of the parting-set subassembly of the product
subassembly, and is displaying the Entire Part reference set.
You can display the Empty reference set for the new product model, so it will
not be automatically loaded when you open the tooling assembly. 9

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-85


Partings

Swap Settings dialog box


Swap Settings
Compare and Match UI When selected, opens the Model Comparison dialog box after
you click OK.
Remove Parting When selected, removes the old parting features and maps the
Features new geometry.
Compare Tolerance Specifies the tolerance within which matching faces and edges
are considered to be unchanged.

9-86 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Model Compare overview


You use the Model Compare command to compare the solid model in the
current product part with a new version of the product model.
A mold tooling assembly must be open before you can use the Model Compare
command.
When you open the dialog box by selecting the Compare and Match UI in
the Swap Settings dialog box, it has two pages, the Compare page and the
Match page.
On the Compare page, you can choose any combination of three views to
display comparison results:

1 — Original model view

2 — New model view

3 — Overlap view

You can select a rendering style in each view. When a view is rendered as
wireframe, the differences between the two model versions are highlighted.
In shaded views, the differences are set to specific face colors, and you can
change the face translucency of the models.

9
On the Match page, you can map removed faces and edges to new ones, so that
patches and other types of features are not lost. For example, if an opening is
moved more than the tolerance amount but not substantially changed, it is
displayed as a removed opening and a new opening. If you map the faces and
edges, the patch sheet associated with the opening will not be lost.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-87


Partings

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard


Mold Wizard®Mold Parting Tools®Swap Model
Toolbar ®Compare and Match UI check box

9-88 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Model Compare options


Option Description
View Display Lets you select any combination of the following check boxes to
display the corresponding view:
• Original Model — Adds a view of the original model to the
view layout.
• New Model — Adds a view of the original model to the view
layout.
• Overlap — Adds an overlapping view of the original and
new models to the view layout.

In multi-view screen layouts:


• Mouse gestures in any view control pan, zoom, and
rotation. For rotations, the view edges control the same
rotations as the window edges in single view layout.
• Only the work view (the word WORK appears after
the view name) is affected by your three dimensional
motion control device. You can right-click the
background of any view and choose Work View.
Shading Shade the view for which the check box on the same row in the
dialog box is named.
You must click Apply to see the change.

If you change the shading of views with the rendering


style menu, the Model Compare dialog box may become
unable to control shading.

Close and reopen the dialog box to recover lost control of


shading.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-89


Partings

Option Description
Highlight Differences Highlights differences in the view for which the check box on the
same row in the dialog box is named.
In wireframe views the differences are highlighted.

In shaded views the differences are colored as specified by the


color swatches for unchanged, altered, removed, and new faces.

Lock Available only both models are shaded.


When selected , causes the sliders to have the following behavior:
• When you click a slider with the control at the far left, the
corresponding model is fully shaded and the other model has
with unchanged faces fully translucent.
• As you move the slider to the right, the unchanged faces of
the corresponding model become more translucent while the
unchanged faces of the other model become more opaque.

This display is best viewed in the two model views.

Original Model Available only when the original model is shaded.


Translucency
Varies the translucency of the original product model.
New Model Available only when the new model is shaded.
Translucency
Varies the translucency of the new product model.
9 Save colors Redefines the face colors in the two product models as the colors
specified to show differences.
You must have write access to the product models to save
the changes permanently.

9-90 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Information display
Unchanged faces Shows the face count of unchanged faces.
The color swatch sets the color for highlighting unchanged faces.
Altered faces Shows the face count of altered faces.
The color swatch sets the color for highlighting altered faces.
Removed faces Shows the face count of removed faces.
The color swatch sets the color for highlighting removed faces.
New faces Shows the face count of new faces.
The color swatch sets the color for highlighting new faces.
Removed Regions Shows face regions that are removed in the new model.
New Regions Shows face regions that are new in the new model
Tolerance Specifies the tolerance within which sheets and edges are
considered unchanged.
Recheck geometry with Compares the models using the current tolerance value to
new tolerance measure differences.

The use of the Match page and the description of the options on the
Match page are discussed in Swap Model.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-91


Partings

Activities
In the Partings section, do the following activities:
• Swap and update after simple changes

• Swap and update with parting loop changes

9-92 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Projects
In the Projects section, do the projects:
• Parting sheets

• Trim and Extend partings

• Replace a product model with a new version

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-93


Partings

Back Up Parting/Patch Sheets overview


Use the Back Up Parting/Patch Sheets command to make a non-associative
copy of parting geometry on another layer.
The Back Up Parting Objects dialog box guides you through making an
unparameterized backup copy of original parting or patch sheets.
After making the backup copies, the software removes the name attributes
of the copied parting objects. Without name attributes, the software cannot
confused copies with the originals.
You can back up individual parting and patch surfaces, or, after you create
the core and cavity, you can create a backup copy of the sewn sheet body.
If you are going to back up only selected parting or patch sheets, on
the Selection bar, use General Selection Filters to make selecting
objects easier.
The backup faces are not associative, but you can make the software
recognize them as parting surfaces. Add the name attribute
MW_PARTING_FACE to sheet faces as you need them.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard


Mold Wizard®Mold Parting Tools®Back Up

Toolbar Parting/Patch Sheets


Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Parting
Menu Tools®Back Up Parting/Patch Sheets

9-94 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Partings

Summary
Mold Wizard provides useful tools for creating parting geometry. You learned
how to define parting curves and edges from existing geometry, and how to
subdivide faces at isocline curves to create a natural parting.
You learned a method to incorporate your own sheets into the associative
parting used by Mold Wizard.
You created region features for core and cavity, then created associative
tooling from each region.
In this lesson you:
• Identified and extracted core and cavity regions using Molded Part
Validation.

• Extracted parting regions and curves.

• Created a custom region for a slide tip.

• Defined guide lines.

• Constructed parting surfaces.

• Created linked core and cavity models.

• Compared an updated model to one used in a tooling assembly

• Substituted updated models in tooling assemblies.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 9-95


9
Lesson

10 Mold Design Validation

Purpose
The mold design contains hundreds of models that should be periodically
checked for proper draft, surface validity, and to verify that no undercuts are
present. Mold Design Validation using the HD3D tools can quickly perform
these checks on a single part or the entire mold assembly.

Objective
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Analyze and validate a mold design.

• Use the molding part to correct design defects.

10
Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 10-1
Mold Design Validation

Mold Design Validation overview

Use the Mold Design Validation command to check molded part quality using
a set of Check Mate checks selected to be useful for molded parts. You can
view the results in the Results group of the HD3D Tools palette.
There are a range of checks for quality, consistency, moldability, and
interference.
The following graphic is a simulated report in the HD3D Tools Check-Mate
results table, including objects:
• Passed with information

• Passed with warning

• Passed

Undercut 3
Undercut Region1 3
Undercut Region2 3
Cross Over Faces 6
Draft Angle 3
Unqualified Faces(+) 4
Unqualified Faces(–) 4
Vertical Faces 24
Unsplit Faces
Model Quality

10
10-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold Design Validation

The following figure shows the display for the preceding simulation. Vertical
faces are highlighted.

The following graphic is a simulated report in the HD3D Tools Check-Mate


results table, including objects:
• Passed with information

• Passed with warning

• Failed

Undercut 3
Draft Angle 3
Unsplit Faces
Model Quality 1
Check Tiny Objects 2
Edge:R-56650-35
Edge:R-56643-35

10
Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 10-3
Mold Design Validation

The following graphic shows a graphics display for the preceding results
table. The tiny objects are highlighted, but they are too tiny to be seen at the
scale of the graphic.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard


Mold Wizard ® Mold Tools ® Mold Design Validation

Toolbar
Tools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® Mold
Menu Tools ® Mold Design Validation

10
10-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold Design Validation

Mold Design Validation dialog box


Parameters vary depending on the checkers selected. Highlight a checker to
display the relevant parameters in the Parameters list. In the Value column,
select true for each option you want to add to the check.
The following Product Quality checkers are available to check bodies, areas,
and faces:
Model Quality
Verifies a selected solid body for such things as data structure, consistency,
face self-intersection, edge tolerances, and tiny objects. Select the
parameters for the checks you want to have performed. You can set the
Tolerance parameter to control the size of objects reported as tiny objects.
Mold Part Quality
Checks for undercuts (faces that cannot be seen when the model is viewed
from a point on the specified vector) and shows you areas that must be
corrected or molded with slides, lifters, and so on.
Checks draft angles on the part, and shows vertical faces or faces with
draft less than the specified draft angle. You can set the Draft Angle
parameter to control the reported angle.

The following Component Validation checks are available for checking


interferences and overlaps.
Electrode Checks for interferences in the electrode assembly.
Parameters allow you to specify whether you want to:
• Create a sparking area sheet body.

• Create an interference body.

• Map color from the workpiece to the electrode.

• Calculate the extent of the areas where the electrode


and workpiece touch.

Core/Cavity Validates the division of the part into cavity and core,
checks the geometry of each sheet that is going to be
sewn, and checks for and highlights overlapping sheets. A
parameter setting allows you to specify whether you want
the regions mapped by color.
Pocket Checks for intersecting components, and highlights and
shows all standard parts that have no corresponding
pockets. 10
Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 10-5
Mold Design Validation

The following Parting Validation checks are available:


Unsplit Faces Shows faces that must be split before you can define core
and cavity regions.
Overlap Patch Checks for patch surfaces that overlap each other and
Surface must be repaired before you can create trim sheets. Use
the Distance Tolerance parameter to specify the overlap
limit.
Sheet Body Checks the boundaries of sheet bodies, and is especially
Boundary useful for finding gaps in sheet bodies that patch internal
loops.

Select Body Depending on the checker you select, you may have to
select the body. In some cases, you have to select target
and tool bodies.
Specify Vector Lets you specify an ejection direction for undercut, draft,
and split face checking.
If a draw direction is specified in the Mold Wizard
application, it is used as the default direction.
Execute Starts the validation process.
Check-Mate
Settings: Always Saves results in the work part and makes them
Save Results in immediately available the next time you open the part.
Part

10
10-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold Design Validation

Mold Design Validation related topics

Check-Mate settings
In the customer defaults, File®Utilities®Customer
Defaults®Analysis®Check-Mate®General Tab there are two settings that
affect the results you see:
• Maximum Number of Logged Objects

• Maximum Number of Displayed Objects

For use with the Mold Design Validation command, Siemens PLM Software
recommends that you change each of the preceding settings from its default
value to 500.
Larger values slow the performance of Check-Mate checking. You can
determine the optimum settings for the part that you are checking.

Sample of possible results


Checker Result Comments
Mold Part Quality,
Passed No undercuts
Undercut checker
Passed with Information Identifies undercut faces
Identifies faces in the
following groups:

No draft
Mold Part Quality, Draft •
Positive draft less
Passed with Information than the specified
Angle Checker
draft angle.
• Negative draft less
than the specified
draft angle.
Unsplit Faces Checker Passed No problems
Identifies faces that you
Failed must split into core and
cavity faces.
Model Quality Checker Passed No problems
Passed with Information Identifies sheet bodies

10
Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 10-7
Mold Design Validation

Checker Result Comments


Identifies the following:
• Geometry with a
dimension below
the set modeling
tolerance, such as
curves, solids, faces,
and edges.

Failed • Bodies with corrupt


structures.

• Faces that
self-intersect.

• Edges with modeling


tolerance greater
than the specified
tolerance.

10
10-8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold Design Validation

The molding part


The molding part contains a geometry-linked copy of the product model. This
link is the first in a chain of linked bodies.

The molding part, since it is closest to the original part in the linked
structure, is ideal to add molding features such as draft, split faces, or edge
blends to make the product model moldable.
The illustration below is showing where draft and blends were added to
the support boss and rib geometry in the “molding” component.

Full association is kept when a new product version is swapped, even if the
original product was translated from another CAD system.

10
Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 10-9
Mold Design Validation

Activity
In the Mold Design Validation section, do the following activity:
• Molding part topology changes and update

10
10-10 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold Design Validation

Summary
In this lesson you:
• Analyzed and validated the mold design for the core model.

• Used the molding part to correct design defects.

10
Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 10-11
10
11
Lesson

11 Mold base

Purpose
In this lesson you will select and add a standard mold base to a mold project
assembly.

Objective
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Use the Mold Base Design dialog box to add a standard mold base to a
mold tooling assembly.

• Configure a Universal mold base for a custom mold design.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 11-1


Mold base

11
Mold Base Library overview
Use the Mold Base Library command to:
• Add mold base assemblies to Mold Wizard projects.

• Edit the mold base configuration and dimensions.

• Edit existing templates.

• Register new templates.

• Replace a mold base with a different one

• Register custom mold base models and database files in the library.

Each of the mold base types has different characteristics that make it suitable
for certain projects. The mold base library includes:
• Standard mold bases — Configure one of the existing library members.

• Interchangeable mold bases — Configure plate stacks and use


non-standard dimensions.

• Universal mold bases — Configure a stack of plain plates in thousands


of combinations not available in the interchangeable types.

• Custom mold bases — If your project requires a mold base that is so


unique that it cannot be modeled with the standard, interchangeable or
universal mold base, you can develop your own mold base and add it to
the available library choices.

Application Mold Wizard


Toolbar
Mold Wizard®Mold Base Library
Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Mold Base
Library

11-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold base

11
Mold Base Design dialog box

Unlabeled areas of the dialog box include:


1. Buttons to access the register and database spreadsheets.
2. List of available index sizes.
3. List of parameters you can edit.
4. Parameter edit box.
5. Lists of available standard values for various sizes.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 11-3


Mold base

11
Add a mold base from a standard catalog
You can use the Mold Base command to specify or edit basic parameters such
as mold length and width, plate thickness, and stand-off distance.

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Mold Base .

2. In the Mold Base Management dialog box, from the Catalog list, select
an available manufacturer.

3. From the Type list, select an available type of mold base that the
manufacturer offers.

4. From the list of available index sizes, select a size to accommodate the
layout dimensions shown in the Layout Information list.

5. (Optional) From the standard option lists available, select the values you
want to use. For example, most catalogs have lists for BP_h and AP_h, or
B-plate height and A-plate height.
You can refer to the option abbreviations shown in the bitmap.

6. (Optional) From the list of parameters, select any sizes that do not appear
in the standard lists, specify the values you want in the edit box, and
press enter after every edit.

7. Click OK or Apply.

8. (Optional) After you click Apply, if the mold base needs to be rotated 90

degrees, click Rotate Mold Base .

11-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold base

11
Configure an interchangeable mold base

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Mold Base .

2. In the Mold Base Management dialog box, from the Catalog list, select
an available manufacturer.
You can identify the manufacturers who offer an interchangeable
mold base by the suffix:
• _INTERCHANGEABLE

• _INTERCH

3. From the Type list, select an available type of mold base that the
manufacturer offers.

4. From the list of available index sizes, select a size to accommodate the
layout dimensions shown in the Layout Information list.

5. (Optional) From the standard option lists available, select the values you
want to use. For example, most catalogs have lists for BP_h and AP_h, or
B-plate height and A-plate height.
You can refer to the option abbreviations and various configurations
in the bitmap.

6. (Optional) From the list of parameters, select any sizes that do not appear
in the standard lists, specify the values you want in the edit box, and
press enter after every edit.

7. At any time as you configure the mold base, click Edit Component
to edit any of the available interchangeable components for the selected
mold base.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 11-5


Mold base

11
The Edit Component command opens the Edit Moldbase
Components dialog box.
This dialog box is a member of the Standard Part Management
family. For more information, see the online Help for Standard
Parts.
Edits you make to the components are reflected automatically in
the bill of materials.

8. Click OK or Apply.

9. (Optional) After you click Apply, if the mold base needs to be rotated 90

degrees, click Rotate Mold Base .

11-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold base

11
Configure a universal mold base
The universal mold base assembly contains the maximum number of plates
that would be useful for 99% of injection molds, except stack molds. The
universal mold base is divided into eight configurable mold base zones.
Mold lengths and widths are controlled by the mold_l and mold_w parameters.
The plate heights are controlled by the parameters shown in uppercase
letters adjacent to the plates.

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Mold Base .

2. In the Mold Base Management dialog box, from the Catalog list, select
UNIVERSAL.

3. From the standard option lists, configure each of the eight zones of the
mold base by referring to the bitmap columns.
• Refer to the separate bitmap areas for four plate zones in the fixed half
on the left, and four in the moving half on the right.

• The parameter name for each plate is shown in the box to the left
of the zone.

• Refer to the number above each column as the value to select for each
plate name to configure the stack designated by the plate name and
column number.

• Refer to the parameter names shown to the right each plate in the
stacks for plate thickness parameters.

• You can omit any plate by choosing the parameter value 000.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 11-7


Mold base

11
You can refer to the option abbreviations shown in the bitmap.

The fixed half of the bitmap is shown in the following figure.

The moving half of the bitmap is shown in the following figure.

4. From the list of parameters, select the sizes for:


• The overall mold base width, mold_w.

• The overall mold base length, mold_l.

• The fixed and moving stand-off distances, BP_off and AP_off.

11-8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold base

11
• Plate thicknesses; every possible plate name is identified in the
bitmap.

• Ejector clearance, ej_clr.

• Support plate, or container plate width, cp_w.

• Sprue position, sprue_x and sprue_y.


This does not add a sprue pin; there are currently no parts that
make use of the sprue expressions. The sprue expressions are
provided to make it easier for you to customize a mold base.

5. Click OK or Apply.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 11-9


Mold base

11
Mold Base dialog box
Toggle/Option/Button Description
Catalog Selects the mold base catalog to use in the current mold base.
The catalog choices depend upon the project units. If the project
units are in inches, only inch unit mold bases are available, and
the same applies to metric projects.
Type Selects from available configurations, such as A-series, B-series, or
3-plate molds.
Bitmap Shows a picture of the selected mold base catalog and type.
Mold base Index Lets you select the length and width of the mold base.
Opens the mold base register spreadsheet file.

Edit Register File


Opens the database spreadsheet file for the currently selected mold
base.
Edit Data Base
Rotates the mold base 90 degrees about the Z-axis.

Rotate Mold Base


Opens the Edit Mold Base Components dialog box to edit the
components of interchangeable mold bases.
Edit Component
Layout Shows the maximum layout dimensions of the cavities.
Information
Expression list Shows all parameters listed in the mold base database file and lets
you select them for editing.
Expression edit Lets you edit the parameter currently selected in the expression list.
box
Option data Lets you specify option data, such as plate thickness, by selecting
from lists.

11-10 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold base

11
Activity
In the Mold base section, do the following activity:
• Add a mold base

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 11-11


Mold base

11
Projects
In the Projects section, do the projects:
• Standard mold base

• Use the universal mold base

• Use an interchangeable mold base

11-12 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold base

11
Summary
This lesson introduces the Mold Base Design dialog box and the process to
add a mold base to an existing mold insert layout.
In this lesson you:
• Used the Mold Base Design command to add a standard mold base to a
two cavity mold assembly.

• Configured a Universal mold base for a custom mold design.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 11-13


11
Lesson

12 Standard Parts
12

Purpose
You will use the Standard Part Library to add standard parts to a mold base
assembly, including sprue bushings, locating rings, slides, and lifters. Mold
Wizard automation also provides for the trimming of ejector pins and other
components that require the molded part profile geometry such as core pins.

Objective
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Select standard parts from a standard parts catalog.

• Add slides and lifters to an assembly.

• Add standard parts to a mold base assembly.

• Edit standard part parameters and define locating points.

• Trim ejector pins to the correct length.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 12-1


Standard Parts

Standard parts
Mold Wizard, Progressive Die Wizard, Engineering Die Wizard, and Die
Design provide several libraries of standard parts that you can use to create
12 your design.
The standard part libraries available provide a wide selection of commonly
used components that you can install and adjust, such as bushings, ejector
pins, and inserts.
You can customize your libraries to match your company’s design standards
and expand the library to include any component or assembly.
You can add standard parts to your mold or die assembly in one of two ways:

• Using theReuse Library on the Resource bar. This is the preferred


method.

• Using the Standard Part Library command.

Standard Part Management system


The Standard Part Management system consists of libraries of parts and
supporting database spreadsheets.
You can use the Standard Part Management system to:
• Register components in a new or existing catalog.

• Install new components or instances of existing components.

• Position standard parts in the mold or die assembly.

• Edit database spreadsheets to control optional parameter choices and


attributes for parts lists.

• Use database spreadsheets to define interpart expressions to link


components and mold bases.

• Remove components.

Application Mold Wizard, Progressive Die Wizard, Engineering Die


Wizard, Die Design, and Modeling
Resource Bar
Reuse Library ®MW Standard Part Library or PDW
Standard Part Library, or EDW Standard Part Library, or
Stamping Die Standard Part Library

12-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Standard Parts

Toolbar Mold Wizard, Progressive Die Wizard, Engineering Die

Wizard, or Die Design®Standard Parts


Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Standard Part
Library
12
Tools®Process Specific®Progressive Die Wizard or
Engineering Die Wizard®Standard Parts
Tools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®Die
Design®Standard Parts

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 12-3


Standard Parts

Standard Part Management dialog box


Folder View
The Name list displays the available libraries. Each folder in the selected
12 library identifies the type of part it contains.
By default, only libraries of the same units as the project are displayed. In
the customer defaults, under Standard Parts, on the General page, you can
select the Allow Mixed Units check box to show both English and metric.
Member View

Only available if you select Standard Part Library from the Mold Wizard
toolbar. This view corresponds to the Member Select panel in the Reuse
Library.
The Object list displays the parts available in the folder you selected in
the Name list.
The parts listed represent entries in a Standard Parts Register file.
Part
If you insert the part from the Reuse Library, it is already
selected.
Select Standard Otherwise, you must select a part from the Object list
Part in the Member View group.
Component Only appears when you edit the standard part.
If it is a single component, its name is displayed.
If it is an assembly, its name and the names of its children
are listed. You can select an individual component or the
entire assembly to edit.
Add Instance Lets you add a single instance of the selected standard
part to your assembly. The standard part is a new
component in your assembly.
New Component Lets you add multiple instances of the selected standard
part to your assembly. The standard part is a new
component with multiple instances in your assembly.
If the standard part is a sub-assembly, such as a die base,
it is added to your assembly as one or more instances of a
subassembly and its child components.
Modify Only appears when you edit the standard part.
Indicates that you are making changes to the selected
standard part.
Concept Design Specifies that NX should insert the standard part as a
parameterized symbol rather than as a solid body.

12-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Standard Parts

Rename Displays the Part Name Management dialog box before


Components loading the part. You can rename the part, or all the
parts if it is a subassembly, prior to loading.
Only appears when you edit the standard part.
Reposition 12
Lets you move the component, using the standard
assemblies reposition functions.
Only appears when you edit the standard part.
Lets you reverse the placement direction of the selected
Flip Direction standard part.
Only appears when you edit the standard part.
Lets you remove the selected instance of standard part,
Remove along with its linked pockets.
Component
Is only available when help content is defined in the
corresponding standard part data file.
Help Provides information on the selected standard part.
Controls the display of the standard part information
window.
Show/Hide
Information
window

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 12-5


Standard Parts

Placement

Parent If the part that you want to be a parent part is not in the
list, you need to make it the work part before you open
12 the Standard Part Management dialog box.
Position Lets you select a method for positioning the standard
part in the mold or die assembly.
NULL
Places the absolute WCS of the standard part at the
absolute WCS of the parent component.
WCS
Places the absolute WCS of the standard part at the
WCS of the displayed part.
WCS_XY
Places the absolute WCS of the standard part at the
WCS X-Y plane of the displayed part at the absolute
Z 0 level.
POINT
Places the absolute WCS of the standard part at any
point selected on the X-Y plane of the displayed part.
POINT PATTERN
Positions the standard part using a pattern of points
you have created, based on a standard Point Pattern
in the MW Standard Part Library.
PLANE
Prompts you to select a planar face or datum plane
from any component and you are then prompted for
an origin. The X-Y plane of the standard part is
placed coplanar to the selected face or plane.
ABSOLUTE
Places the added component at the absolute CSYS.
REPOSITION
Places the added components at a location you choose,
and displays the Move Component dialog box.
MATE
Opens the Assembly Constraints dialog box.

12-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Standard Parts

Placement

Reference Set Controls which reference set is displayed for a selected


standard part. Three options are available; True, False,
and Entire Part. 12
TRUE Contains the component body.
FALSE Contains the body used for mounting
pockets.
Entire Part Contains both TRUE and FALSE
reference sets.
Standard parts that require mounting-pockets include a
pocket cutting body that defines the shape of the pocket.
The pocket cutting body is placed in the FALSE reference
set.
The Pocket command subtracts a geometry-linked copy of
the FALSE body from a target object to create a mounting
pocket.
Details
Name/Value list Shows the parameters, such as length, diameter, and
radius, and their corresponding values, for the selected
part.

The Lock and Unlock commands are used to lock


or unlock dimensions after the component is installed.
When you make a change to the mold design that would
ordinarily cause dimensions to automatically update,
locked dimensions do not update.
Most parameters are unlocked by default. Click on the
Unlock icon next to the item to lock it.
Settings

Associative For the PLANE method only. Makes the standard part
Position associative to the face or plane and origin point location
you use to position it. If the origin point moves, the
standard part moves with it.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 12-7


Standard Parts

Component sets
Mold component grouping requirements differ from component to component.
The Standard Part Management System can accommodate the needs of
12 different component grouping cases:

• Single components — Some mold components, such as sprue bushings,


are installed as single components. These standard parts are usually
modeled as a single part file that contains two bodies: the component
and the pocket cutting body.

• Component assemblies — Some components, such as locating rings with


screws, are assemblies. These standard parts are usually assemblies of
each component. For example, a locating ring assembly may be a ring
component and two instances of a screw component. The pocket-cutting
body may be in the ring component with features for the tapped holes, or
in both the ring and screw components. Parameters for the components
are controlled by expressions in the top component of the standard part
assembly through interpart expressions.

• Component sets — Some components, such as screws, are best installed


as sets of components. Component sets are usually a parent component
containing multiple instances of a subcomponent.
The subcomponent is usually positioned relative to its parent by mating
conditions and will often have many instances where their existence is
controlled by suppression-by-expression. Parameters for the components
are controlled by expressions in the top component of the standard part
assembly through interpart expressions.

You can add or edit some standard parts in sets. This method is designed
to allow fast installation of components in patterns, such as sets of pins or
bushings.
In the Reuse Library Standard Part Management dialog box, component sets
are identified with the suffix _SET, for example the SHCS_SET.

Notice that the installation of the component set only sets the number
and position of the components. Edit the parameters of the component
to have the BOM report it correctly.

A bitmap image of the selected pattern option is shown in the Information


window.
You can place component sets as you would typical standard parts.
You can edit the dimensions of the pattern in the Details group, in the
Standard Part Management dialog box.

12-8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Standard Parts

In some component sets, such as HASCO guide-pins and bushings,


three components are identical while one component is different.
HASCO uses a smaller diameter pin and bushing in one corner to
prevent incorrect mold assembly.
Generally, this the parameters of the dissimilar component are 12
identified in the primary component, the one with multiple instances.
The expressions are linked to keep the different components
synchronized. Since the dimensions of both types of components within
the set are managed by a single database, you must select the primary
instanced component of the set instead of the unique component of the
set to access the database for editing.
For example, to edit a mixed set of guide pins, select one of the three
instanced pins instead of the offset pin.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 12-9


Standard Parts

Slide and Lifter overview


You can use the Slider and Lifter command to design the slides and lifters
you need.
12
From the structure point of view, slides and lifters are mainly composed of
two parts, the head and body. The head is dependent on the product shape.
The body is composed of customizable standard parts.

Head Design
You can create slide or lifter heads by using the Solid Head method or Trim
Body method.

Solid Head
To use the solid head method to create a slide or lifter head, on the Mold Tools
toolbar, select Solid Split. After you create the solid head in a core or cavity
and add the slide or lifter body, you can link the head into the slide or lifter
body part and unite it with the body. You can also create a new component
and link the head to the new component.
The solid head method is often used in slide head design.

Trim Body
To create a trim body:
1. Add the slide or lifter to the mold base.

2. Set the main body of the slide or lifter as the work part.

3. Use the Trim Mold Components command to trim the head of the slide
or lifter.

12-10 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Standard Parts

Body Design
Slide and lifter bodies are usually composed of several components such as
the main body, guides, etc. These components are assembled by the NX
Assembly function. The sizes of slides and lifters are controlled by the
dimensions. The assembly of slides or lifters can be looked at as standard
12
parts. Therefore, standard part methods are used for slide and lifter design.
The following figure is an example of a slide body.

1. Baseplate

2. Direction of Motion for Slide

3. Cam Drive Unit

4. Direction of Motion for Tool

5. Tool Section

6. Gibs

7. Slide

8. Drive Faces of Cam Unit

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 12-11


Standard Parts

Registering Slides and Lifters


The Mold Wizard engineering library includes typical slide and lifter
structures. You can also register your own slide and lifter structures.
12 Slide and lifter files are stored in the directory .../moldwizard/slider_lifter.
All slides and lifters need to be registered before you can use them. The
register file is named slider_lifter_reg.xls. There are registration sheets for
each unit type: SLIDE_IN for inch registration, SLIDE_MM for metric
registration. When you click Edit Register File, the register file is opened in
the spreadsheet application.

12-12 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Standard Parts

Slide and lifter configurations


The following are provided in the Mold Wizard engineering database.

12

Push-Pull Slide
Dowel Lifter

Single Cam-pin Slide Dual Cam-pin Slide

Sankyo Lifter

1. Origin point
2. Parting plane
3. YC+ direction

The push-pull and cam-pin slides and the dowel lifter default to
WCS_XY positioning.
The Sankyo lifter defaults to POINT positioning.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 12-13


Standard Parts

Trim Mold Components overview


Use the Trim Mold Components command to associatively trim components
to a defined trim sheet in the cavity or core, or to the mold surface.
12 Components you might trim include:
• Sub-inserts.

• Electrodes.

• Standard parts such as slides, lifters, and core-pins.

You can select trim tools defined with the Define Trim Tool command, or
other surfaces.
In the Trim Mold Components dialog box, you can:
• Choose Adjust Length, Sheet Trim or UnTrim.

• Specify the part that contains the trim sheet you are using.

• Remove previously applied trim.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard


Mold Wizard®Mold Trim Tools®Trim Mold Components

Toolbar
Tools®®Mold Wizard®Mold Trim Tools
Menu Drop-down®Trim Mold Components

12-14 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Standard Parts

Trim dialog boxes


The Trim Mold Components and the Ejector Pin Post Processing dialog
boxes are essentially the same.
12

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 12-15


Standard Parts

Trim a component with an existing trim sheet

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Trim Mold Components .


12 2. In the Trim Mold Components dialog box, in the Type group, from the
list, select Trim.

3. In the Target group, click Select Body .

4. (Optional) In the settings group, set Target Scope to Product or Any.

5. Select a target body to be trimmed.

6. In the Tool group, from the Trim Part list, select the part that contains the
trim tool body that you wish to use.

7. From the Trim Surface list, select the trim sheet you want to use. For
example, you can select:
• A previously identified trim sheet, such as the CORE_TRIM_SHEET or
the CAVITY_TRIM_SHEET.

• Select Faces.

• Select Sheet Body.

8. Click OK or Apply.

12-16 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Standard Parts

Trim Mold Components dialog box


Type
list Trim
Applies sheet trim to the selected 12
targets.
Untrim
Removes existing trim.
Target
Lets you select the target body to be
trimmed.
Select Body Selection scope depends on the Target
Scope setting in the Settings group.
Tool

The Tool group appears when the trim type is set to Trim.
Trim Part Specifies the part that contains the
trim sheet to be used.
Trim Surface Lets you:
• Specify an existing trim sheet.

• Define a new trim sheet and add


it to the trim geometry list.

• Select existing faces or a sheet


body.
Available when required selections
are made.
Reverse Direction
Reverses the trim direction of the
selected trim sheet for the pending
trim feature.
Settings
Target Scope Product
(Default setting) Restricts target body
selection to bodies in the product
subassembly.
Any
Lets you select any target body in the
current mold tooling assembly.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 12-17


Standard Parts

Ejector Pin Post Processing overview


You can use the Ejector Pin Post Processing command to:
12 • Alter the length of ejector pins from the standard parts library.

• Set the fit distance, the length of the tightly fitting ejector-pin hole.

• Remove existing trim.

You can select trim tools defined with the Define Trim Tool command, or
other surfaces.
You should trim the core or cavity before you use the Ejector Pin Post
Processing command.

When you define ejector pins from the standard parts library, you must select
a pin that is longer than necessary so it can be adjusted to the correct length.
You can choose whether to:
• Reduce memory requirements by saving identical pins to a single common
file that is instanced.

• Force every pin to be saved to a unique part file.

Offset Value
The Offset Value setting controls the distance between the lowest point of the
ejector pin hole and the level where the ejector pin clearance hole changes
from close fit to extra clearance. Ejector pins can be selected individually to
alter the fit distance for any one of them. You can set the default for the
Offset Value setting in the Mold Wizard customer default under Others,
Ejector Pin, Fit Distance.

12-18 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Standard Parts

12

Adjusted pin
Original pin
Highest point of contact with part
Core cavity contour contour

Adjusted pin with Offset Value set to Trimmed pin, with Offset Value set
–1.0 mm to 0.5 mm

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 12-19


Standard Parts

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

12 Toolbar Mold Wizard ® Ejector Pin Post Processing


Tools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® Ejector
Menu Pin Post Processing

12-20 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Standard Parts

Trim ejector pins


Before you trim pins, you should define the core and cavity sheets.

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Ejector Pin Post Processing .


12
2. In the Ejector Pin Post Processing dialog box, from the list in the Type
group, select Trim.
The list in the Target group displays the part file names of pins that you
can trim.
You can add pins that are already trimmed or adjusted to the list.
Right-click the name of a pin and choose Show All.

3. Select one or more pins to be processed.


You can select names from the list, or select the pins in the graphics
window.

4. (Optional) In the Tool group, if necessary, from the Trim Part list, select
a part that contains identified trim geometry.
The default is the automatically defined trim part in your assembly.

5. (Optional) From the Trim Surface list, select previously defined trim
geometry, faces, or a sheet body.
The default is the automatically defined CORE_TRIM_SHEET.

6. (Optional) In the Settings group, define the Offset Value.

7. (Optional) If there are multiple instances of the pin that should have
different trim or different orientations, select the Save as Unique Part
check box.

8. (Optional) If you selected the Save as Unique Part check box, you can
select the Rename Component check box to specify names for the new
pins that are generated.

9. Click OK or Apply.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 12-21


Standard Parts

Untrim pins

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Ejector Pin Post Processing .


12
2. In the Ejector Pin Post Processing dialog box, from the list in the Type
group, select Untrim.
The list in the Target group displays the part file names of pins that are
already trimmed or adjusted.

3. Select one or more pins to be untrimmed.


You can select names from the list, or select the pins in the graphics
window.

4. Click OK or Apply.

12-22 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Standard Parts

Adjust pin lengths

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Ejector Pin Post Processing .


12
2. In the Ejector Pin Post Processing dialog box, from the list in the Type
group, select Adjust Length.
The list in the Target group displays the part file names of pins that not
trimmed or adjusted.

3. Select one or more pins.


You can select names from the list, or select the pins in the graphics
window.

4. (Optional) In the Tool group, change the default trim part and sheet.

5. (Optional) In the Settings group, define the Offset Value.

6. (Optional) If there are multiple instances of the pin that should have
different trim or different orientations, select the Save as Unique Part
check box.

7. (Optional) If you selected the Save as Unique Part check box, you can
select the Rename Component check box to specify names for the new
pins that are generated.

8. Click OK or Apply.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 12-23


Standard Parts

Ejector Pin Post Processing dialog box


Type
list Adjust Length
12 Adjusts the length parameter of the
ejector pin part.
Trim
Applies sheet trim to the pin.
Untrim
Removes existing trim.
Target
list Shows available pins for processing.
You can filter the list to show all pins
or only pins that are valid for the
operation specified in the Type list.
Part Name
Appears in native NX.
Shows the file name of available
ejector pins.
Part Number
Appears in Teamcenter
Integration for NX.
Shows the Teamcenter part
number of available pins.
Count
Shows the number of instances of
the current pin in the assembly.
Status
Shows the current condition of
the pin: Original, Adjusted, or
Trimmed.

You can right-click a line in the list


and choose:
Show All
Displays all pins.

12-24 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Standard Parts

Show Candidates
Displays pins that are eligible
for the selected operations. For
example, if Trim is selected, only
12
untrimmed and non-adjusted pins
are shown.

You can right-click the list background


and choose:
Export to Browser
Creates an HTML file showing
the list contents and opens it in
your browser.
Export to Spreadsheet
Creates an spreadsheet file
showing the list contents and
opens it in your spreadsheet
application.
Lets you select the target ejectors to
be processed.
Select Ejectors You can select pins from the list, or in
the graphics window.
Tool

The Tool group appears when the trim type is set to Trim or Adjust Length.
Trim Part Specifies the part that contains the
trim sheet to be used.
Trim Surface Lets you:
• Specify an existing trim sheet.

• Define a new trim sheet and add


it to the trim geometry list.

• Select existing faces or a sheet


body.
Settings
The Settings group appears when the trim type is set to Trim or Adjust
Length.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 12-25


Standard Parts

Offset Value Specifies an offset for the trimmed


face of the pin. For example,
you might add a small offset to
compensate for heat expansion, or to
12 make sure that no product material
extends beyond the surrounding face
into the ejector hole.
Save As Unique Part When selected, trimmed instances
of the same part are always saved
as unique parts, even if trimming
creates pins with the same shape.
Rename Components Appears when Save As Unique Part
is selected.
Opens the Part Name Management
dialog box after you click Apply. You
can rename new unique pin parts.

12-26 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Standard Parts

Ejector pin holes


Ejectors components have TRUE and FALSE reference sets, with a solid body
in each reference set. For brevity, these bodies are called the TRUE and
FALSE bodies. The part file also contains an original body that maintains
the nominal parameters of the pin.
12
The FALSE body is used to create the hole, with a close fitting diameter for
the distance over which the ejector seals the mold opening, and a larger
diameter for clearance to permit easy motion of the pin. When you use the
Ejector Pin Post Processing command, this body is modified to position the
shoulder between the close-fitting diameter HOLE_DIA and the loose-fitting
CLEARANCE_DIA_PIN at the FIT_DISTANCE from the tip of the
trimmed TRUE body.
The TRUE body represents the pin in the tooling assembly. When you use the
Ejector Pin Post Processing command, this body is trimmed or adjusted to
the assembled length, plus the OFFSET_VALUE if you specify it.

HOLE_DIA=NOMINAL_DIA+HOLE_DIA_ADJUST on the FALSE


body
CLEARANCE_DIA_PIN=<UM_VAR>::EJ_CLEARANCE_DIA_*
on the FALSE body
End of pin in TRUE body after postprocessing
PIN_DIA=NOMINAL_DIA+PIN_DIA_ADJUST on the TRUE body
The FIT_DISTANCE parameter of the FALSE body in the ejector part
file. The position of the shoulder is updated after postprocessing calculates
the final length of the TRUE body.

Ejector pin holes are formed when you use the Pocket command. Since
the body in the FALSE reference set is not trimmed, you must be
careful to use the Target and Tool option when you cut pockets for the
ejector pins. By selecting target bodies, you avoid cutting unwanted
holes in the cavity.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 12-27


Standard Parts

Notice that the diameter of the true body is often smaller than nominal.
There are two values that can dictate clearance over the length of the hole
that has the nominal diameter, in the preceding graphic. The value
HOLE_DIA_ADJUST is applied to the hole or FALSE body, and the value
12 PIN_DIA_ADJUST is applied to the pin or TRUE body. Typically, holes are
made by nominal diameter drills and nominal reamers; so, it is common to
adjust the pin diameter to avoid binding during ejection.
In the Ejector Pin Post Processing command, ejectors are recognized
because they have a part attribute UM_EJECTOR=1. If you create
a custom ejector pin, add this part attribute so that the command
recognizes it. If possible, modify an existing pin so that the necessary
bodies and expressions are in place.

12-28 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Standard Parts

Opening large Mold Wizard assemblies


Tooling assemblies can be quite large.
On Windows systems, you can avoid having to search a long list for the top
part. 12
In the Windows Open Part File dialog box, type the file name *top*.prt and
press Enter.
The file list is filtered to only top level parts in the current folder.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 12-29


Standard Parts

Activity
In the Standard Parts section, do the following activity:
• Add lifters and screws to an assembly
12

12-30 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Standard Parts

Projects
In the Projects section, do the projects:
• Add standard parts
12
• Cavity side ejectors

• Ejector pin post processing

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 12-31


Standard Parts

Summary
This lesson introduced the Standard Part Management dialog box window
and discussed the process of adding standard parts to the mold base assembly.
12 In this lesson you:
• Added sliders and lifters to a family mold assembly.

• Selected standard screws and dowels from a catalog.

• Saw ways to edit standard part parameters and define locating points.

• Trimmed ejector pins to the correct length.

12-32 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Lesson

13 Sub-insert Library

Purpose 13
Many molds have high wear areas or sections that can be machined
conveniently if a separate block or cylinder of steel is used. Use the
Sub-insert Library command to rapidly design and place auxiliary pieces in
the tooling assembly.

Objective
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Add a sub-insert from the library.

• Position and modify existing sub-inserts.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 13-1


Sub-insert Library

Sub-insert Library overview


Use the Sub-insert Library command to choose an insert from a library of
inserts that your company can customize. Add the inserts to your tooling
assembly:
• In any area of the cavity or core where excessive wear occurs.

• To simplify the manufacture of the cavity and core.


13 You should create the cavity and core bodies before you define a
sub-insert.

Methods for Designing Sub-Inserts


When you want to design a sub-insert, you can choose one of the following
commands:
• Sub-insert Library — Add a standard sub-insert from an extendable
library that is provided with the Mold Wizard engineering database. This
method is described on this page. The sub-insert library has the same
interface and features as the Standard Part Management system.

• Design Inserts — Add a foot to any existing body and save it as a new
component. You can find this command on the Mold Tools toolbar.

Where do I find it?


Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Sub-insert Library

13-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Sub-insert Library

Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Sub-insert


Menu Library

13

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 13-3


Sub-insert Library

Design a Sub-insert using the library


1. Change the displayed part to the cavity or core insert for which you
require a sub-insert.

2. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Sub-insert Library .

3. In the Insert Design dialog box, on the Catalog page, from the parts list,
select one of:
13
• CAVITY SUB INSERT

• CORE SUB INSERT

4. From the SHAPE list, select one of:


• RECTANGLE

• ROUND

5. From the FOOT list, select one of:


• ON

• OFF

6. From the MATERIAL list, select one of:


• P20

• H13

• S7

7. (Optional) Choose a positioning method.


POINT is the default method. You can select any of the other
available methods.

8. On the Dimension page, using the bitmap image as a guide, configure


the parameters.

13-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Sub-insert Library

13
The RECTANGLE bitmap shows that you can individually control:
• The foot offsets at locations 1, 2, 3, and 4 shown in the plan view
as red numbers.

• The radius at locations 1, 2, 3, and 4 shown in the plan view


as blue numbers.

Zero values for the above parameters are the defaults.


In the default POINT positioning method, the origin of the part is
shown as a red cross at the center of the insert, and the X-axis and
Y-axis are marked.

The ROUND insert works well with the POINT positioning method.
The part origin is at the center of the part, as shown by the red cross.
You need only select an arc center to correctly position the part.

9. Click OK or Apply.

10. Position the sub-insert by the positioning method you chose.

11. Use the Mold Trim command to trim the sub-insert to match the cavity
or core.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 13-5


Sub-insert Library

Activity
In the Sub-insert Library section, do the following activity:
• Add a sub-insert from the library

13

13-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Sub-insert Library

Summary
In this lesson you:
• Added sub-inserts from the library.

• Positioned and modified existing sub-inserts.

13

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 13-7


13
Lesson

14 Gates and runners

Purpose
In this lesson you will design gating and runner systems.

Objective
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to: 14
• Place gates in a mold project

• Attach a runner system to your gates

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 14-1


Gates and runners

Gates and runner systems

Overview

With Mold Wizard gate and runner commands you can design cold runner
systems.
• The Sprue is the path from the outside of the mold to the parting surface.
A standard Sprue Bushing usually forms this section.

• The Runner is a channel that is cut into the parting surface of the cavity,
core, or both, that begins at the end of the Sprue and provides a pathway
to the fill location of the mold cavity.

• The Gate is the final pathway from the runner to the cavity. Gates come
14 in a variety of designs depending on the molding process and cosmetic
requirements of the molded product.

14-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Gates and runners

Gate Library overview


Balance Yes means the same gate size and location can be used in both the
cavities in a two cavity layout. No means that unique gates are required for
each cavity.
Gate Position can be in either the Core or the Cavity.
Gate Point Indication enables you to easily indicate the gate point.
You can choose a gate Type from the gate library. You also can customize
your own gate type.

Gate Point Indication


The tools in Gate Point Indication make it easier to define various types
points where you might want to position gates on the mold cavity. 14
Define a gate point before you design a gate.
The gate point is an existing point that you select as the origin of the gate.

Gate types
• Fan (Trapezoid)
• Film (Overflow)
• Pin (Cylinder)
• Pin Point
• Rectangle (Vent)
• Step Pin
• Tunnel (Tapered sub-gate)
• Curved Tunnel (Cashew or Banana gate)

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Gate Library


Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Gate Library

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 14-3


Gates and runners

Gate Design Dialog box example

14

14-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Gates and runners

Activity
In the Gates and runners section, do the following activity:
• Placing gates

14

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 14-5


Gates and runners

Runner overview
Use the Runner command to create solids that represent channels through
which material flows to fill a mold cavity, or other similar swept geometry.
Major steps in runner design are:
• Define paths for runners to follow.

• Select cross-sections to sweep along each path.

• If you are using the NX solid model to define tool paths, subtract runner
bodies from the appropriate inserts or plates.

14

Sketch Projected curves on non-planar parting

Swept runners

14-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Gates and runners

Tool steel with runner pockets


14
Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Runner


Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Runner

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 14-7


Gates and runners

Runner options
Guide
Available if an existing runner body
is not selected.
Select Curve Lets you select existing curves or
sketch a set of curves to act as sweep
guides for runners.
Runner
Available if curves are not selected.
Lets you select an existing runner to
Select Runner Body edit.
Section
14 Lets you specify an orientation for the
sweep sections.
Specify Vector For example, with some
cross-sections, runners normally
appear only in the core.
You can reverse the vector direction
to place the resulting runner bodies
in the cavity.
Section Type Sets the cross-sectional shape of the
runners from the following choices:
• Circular
• Parabolic
• Trapezoidal
• Hexagonal
• Semi_Circular

14-8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Gates and runners

Runner Design dialog box

14

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 14-9


Gates and runners

Activity
In the Gates and runners section, do the following activity:
• Adding runners

14

14-10 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Gates and runners

Summary
In this lesson you:
• Placed gates a mold project

• Created a runner channel to match the gates.

14

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 14-11


14
Lesson

15 Mold Cooling Tools

Purpose
You will use the cooling standard parts approach to specify both drilled
channels and a variety of plumbing components.

Objective
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Add cooling channels to a tooling assembly.

• Use the Cooling Component Design method. 15


• Create mirrored cooling channels for instanced inserts, and blend a
different corner of each insert to assure correct assembly.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 15-1


Mold Cooling Tools

Mold Cooling Tools overview


Use the Mold Cooling Tools toolbar to access all cooling-related commands:
• Create channels

• Adjust channels

• Add fittings

You can determine the work part in which to create cooling channels as
follows:
• When you require a balanced layout for all cavities, with all instances of
the core and cavity having the same channels, create the channels in
the core and cavity parts.
15
• When you have channels that are different in some or all cavities, or
channels that connect between several cavities, create those channels
in one of the cooling parts.

If you are using one of the cooling parts to hold cooling channels, you can
determine which cooling part to use as follows:
• If only one designer is responsible to create all of the channels, use the
cool part.

• If there are different designers for the cavity and core parts, design the
cavity channels in the cool_side_a part, and the core channels in the
cool_side_b part.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard ® Mold Cooling Tools


Tools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® Cooling
Menu Tools

15-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold Cooling Tools

Pattern Channel overview


Use the Pattern Channel command to design round-profile cooling channels
with:
• Specified existing curves.

• Sketched curves.

You can place both channel axes and baffles in a sketch. Lines are used as
sweep guides, and circles are extruded perpendicular to the sketch plane.
You can preview the resulting bodies.

15

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Cooling Tools ® Pattern Channel


Tools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® Cooling
Menu Tools ® Pattern Channel

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 15-3


Mold Cooling Tools

Create pattern channels


1. Make the part that is to contain the channels the work part.

2. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Mold Cooling Tools .

3. On the Mold Cooling Tools toolbar, click Pattern Channel .

4. In the Pattern Channel dialog box, in the Channel Path group, beside
Select Curve, click Sketch Section .
You can also select existing sketched lines, or existing lines outside of a
sketch.

5. To create an associate datum relative to a face in another part, such as


the workpiece, on the Selection bar, from the Selection Scope list, select
Entire Assembly.
15

6. Define a sketch, using only lines and circles.


In this example, only lines are used.

15-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold Cooling Tools

You can constrain the lines now, or sketch them roughly in the
configuration you want and adjust them later.
15
7. Click Finish Sketch .

8. In the Pattern Channel dialog box, in the Setting group, specify a diameter
for the current set of channels.

9. (Optional) In the Preview group, click Show Result.

10. Click Apply or OK.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 15-5


Mold Cooling Tools

Since the OK button is marked with the symbols for automatic acceptance,
<OK>, you can also choose another command to complete the pattern
channels automatically.

15

15-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold Cooling Tools

Cooling Fittings overview


Use the Cooling Fittings command to add concept cooling fittings to channels.
You can specify fitting points and sketch-based symbols in their design
relation to the channel. You can also manually specify fitting symbol locations.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Cooling Tools ® Cooling Fittings


Tools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® Cooling
Menu Tools ® Cooling Fittings

15

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 15-7


Mold Cooling Tools

Position concept cooling fittings


1. Set your PMI preferences so that the concept symbols display properly in
the graphics window.
a. From the Menu Bar, choose Preferences → PMI→PMI.

b. On the Display tab, in the Display group, clear the Update Reading
Direction After View Rotate check box.

c. Click OK.

2. Make the part to contain the cooling fittings the work part.
The graphic shows the locations for two connectors.

15

3. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Mold Cooling Tools .

4. On the Mold Cooling Tools toolbar, click Cooling Fittings .

5. In the Cooling Fittings dialog box, in the Channel group, click Select

Object .

6. (Optional) In the Boundary Body group, select Auto Search Boundary


Bodies.
Mold Wizard will find any intersection points between channels and
boundary bodies and mark them with appropriate concept symbols.

15-8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold Cooling Tools

7. Select one or more cooling channels to be the location for fittings.

As you select each channel, a corresponding line appears in the dialog box,
in the list in the Fitting Point group. The default type is Pipe Plug. 15
8. (Optional) Specify the type for each fitting point for which you want a
fitting other than a pipe plug.
a. In the Fitting Point group, select a line.
The corresponding channel is highlighted and a dynamic CSYS
appears.
You can drag handles to adjust the location and orientation of the
fitting.

b. To choose a different fitting, click in the Type column, and select the
type of fitting from the list.

c. Continue to modify fitting types until the information is correct for


each fitting point.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 15-9


Mold Cooling Tools

Sketch-based symbols and concept points are placed at the locations


15 you specified.

9. Click Apply or OK.

Use the Concept Design command to add standard parts at fitting points.

15-10 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold Cooling Tools

Concept Design overview


If you use the same set of standard parts in all mold assemblies of a given
type, you can avoid repeating the same installation steps for every standard
part by installing all the common standard parts using a template part that
contains concept design symbols.
In the Concept Design dialog box, you can:
• Select concept design symbols you created using the Concept Position
dialog box.

• Add all of the parts described by the symbol you select in one operation.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Concept Design


Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Concept
Menu Design 15

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 15-11


Mold Cooling Tools

Cooling Standard Part Library


When you click the Cooling Standard Part Library button the Cooling
Component Design dialog box appears.
The cooling hole standard part supports a variety of component types,
such as pipe-plug, baffle, connector-plug and extension plug. Component
configuration may be changed after the hole is installed.
The standard parts based cooling method has two main steps:
• Add a standard part that forms a hole.

• Add a plumbing component to a selected hole.

15

15-12 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold Cooling Tools

Create cooling channels


To create a hole:
1. Choose a component type from the Member View list.

2. Choose a parent:
• For holes in the mold base choose the *_cool part.

• For holes in an insert choose the *_prod part.

3. Edit the cooling hole dimensions using the Details group list.

4. Click Apply.

5. Select a placement plane.

6. Locate the cooling hole using the Position dialog box.

To add a standard component:


15
1. Select an existing hole.

2. Choose a component type from the list.

3. Set the size parameters.

4. Click Apply.

The component is added as a child of the previously selected cooling hole


component.
To change the component type:
1. Remove the previously installed component.

2. Edit the component type of the cooling hole.

3. Choose and install a replacement component.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 15-13


Mold Cooling Tools

Activities
In the Mold Cooling Tools section, do the following activities:
• Cooling using standard parts

• Insert variations

15

15-14 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Mold Cooling Tools

Summary
This lesson introduced Cooling Component Design.
In this lesson you:
• Learned how to create cooling channels using the component design
method.

• Added a cooling circuit to a mold assembly.

• Created variations of the cooling channels and inserts for a multi-cavity


mold.

15

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 15-15


15
Lesson

16 Electrode design

Purpose
Electrode design is a common and very necessary stage of the mold
manufacturing process. Unlike parted mold inserts and standard mold
hardware created with Mold Wizard, electrodes are not components of a
finished mold tooling assembly.

Objective
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Design electrodes using the standard part approach

16

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 16-1


Electrode design

Electrode design
Electrical Discharge Machining (EDM) is used to produce mold cavity
features that are impractical or impossible to machine with milling cutters.
You can use the standard parts approach to create electrodes. The benefit of
using standard parts include:
• You can attach subcomponents.

• You can include pocket-cutting bodies with detailed features.

Electrode design is done in two steps:

1. Retrieve a library tool .

2. Trim the tool to the appropriate mold faces .

Electrode design methods


You can use Customer Defaults to select methods to add electrodes:
• Envelope

• Standard Part (default)


16
• Choose from Dialog Box

To do this, modify the Method option at File→Utilities→Customer


Defaults→Mold Wizard→Others on the Electrode page.

16-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Electrode design

Electrode Design dialog box

16

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 16-3


Electrode design

Simultaneous development
There are several components in the Mold Wizard assembly structure that
you can use for simultaneous tooling development.
In the product subassembly, there are nodes for the cavity (side_a) and core
(side_b).
When you work with one of these subassemblies, changes do not affect any of
the other assemblies. One person can create parts in side_a while another
creates parts in side_b.
There are two scenarios in a network environment where simultaneous
development can work well.
• If the two workers are working from the same directory, to view each
other’s work they must:
1. Close their coworker’s component part without saving it (using the
assembly navigator)
2. Immediately reopen it.

• If each worker has a unique copy of the mold assembly, to view each
other’s work they must:
1. Close their coworker’s component part.
2. Copy the changed subassembly and all of its components.
(Assemblies®Cloning is the recommended means.)
16 3. Reopen the subassembly.

16-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Electrode design

Activity
In the Electrode design section, do the following activity:
• Electrode design in the cardholder project

16

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 16-5


Electrode design

Summary
In this lesson you:
• Designed and placed an electrode from the standard library.

• Trimmed the electrode to the mold surface.

• Used a Synchronous Modeling command to complete the electrode relief.

16

16-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Lesson

17 Creating pockets

Purpose
It is necessary to add pockets to solid bodies in the assembly in order to create
correct drawings and to use the CAM module to machine them.

Objective
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Create pockets to complete your mold design.

• Check the status of pocket creation in a mold design.

17

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 17-1


Creating pockets

Pocket
After you have finished adding standard parts and other components, you can
use the Pocket command to model pockets in die or mold plates, inserts,
and other solid bodies.
Pockets are associative to the tool body by default. You can choose to make
them non-associative to improve performance.
When you create pockets, a tool body is geometry linked in the part containing
the target body, and the linked body is subtracted from or united with the
target body.

When to Create Pockets

To minimize the number of features that update as you design your tooling
assembly, create pockets at the last stage of design:

• After you cut pockets, the number of features in the assembly dramatically
increases, which can affect system performance.

• Some updates may fail if insert groups/standard parts are moved outside
of their target body.

17

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Pocket


Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Pocket

17-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Creating pockets

Pocket dialog box

17

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 17-3


Creating pockets

Pocket design procedures

Creating new pockets


Before you create pockets, you can use the View Manager dialog box
to hide components other than target and tool bodies. This simplifies
selection and checking.

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Pocket .

2. In the Mode group, select Add Material or Subtract Material.

3. (Optional) In the Target group, click Select Object and select one or
more target objects.
If you skip this step, you must select tools and then click Find
Intersecting Components.

4. (Optional) In the Tool group, from the Select Types list or shortcut
buttons, specify whether to select parts or solid bodies.
You can select only parts that have the UM_STANDARD_PART
attribute. For detailed information, see Related Topics.

5. (Optional) If you are selecting parts, in the Tool group, from the Reference
Sets list, select one of the available filters to make selection easier.

6. (Optional) In the Tool group, click Select Object and select one or more
tool objects.
17 If you skip this step, you must select targets and then click Find
Intersecting Components.

7. (Optional) After you select one or more of either targets or tools, in the

Tools group, click Find Intersecting Components .

8. (Optional) In the Tools group, select the Show Target and Tool Bodies
Only check box to temporarily hide all bodies except the current selection
of targets and tools.

9. Click OK or Apply.

17-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Creating pockets

Deleting pockets

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Pocket .

2. Select one or more target bodies or tool bodies that are associated with
pockets.

3. In the Tools group, click Remove Pocket .

Checking pocket status

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Pocket .

2. In the Tools group, click Check Pocket Status .

If there are no standard parts with no corresponding pocket, you will


see an information dialog box advising you that no standard part is
unpocketed.
If there are parts without corresponding pockets, they are highlighted.
You can see a count of parts without pockets in the Status line.

17

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 17-5


Creating pockets

Pocket dialog box


Mode
list Subtract Material — In body selection mode, subtract a copy of
each tool body from the target(s). In part selection mode, subtract
a copy of the FALSE reference set of each part from the target(s).
Add Material — In body selection mode, unite a copy of each tool
body with the target(s). In part selection mode, unite a copy of the
ADD_MATERIAL reference set of each part with the target(s).
Target
Select one or more target bodies.

Select Object
Tool
Select one or more tool parts or bodies.

Select Object
Tool Type
Solid — Filters the Select Object command in the Tool group
to select only solids.

Part — Filters the Select Object command in the Tool group


to select only parts.

Show Shortcuts — Replaces the Select Types list with the


Solid and Part buttons.

Hide Shortcuts — Replaces the Select Types Solid and Part


buttons with the list.
17 Reference Sets When Part is selected in the Tool Type group, specifies the
reference set to display:
• Both

• False

• True

• Add_material

17-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Creating pockets

Tools
Find all target bodies that intersect with selected tool bodies, or
find all tool bodies that intersect with selected target bodies.
Find Intersecting
Components
Highlight and show a total count of all standard parts that have no
corresponding pockets in the Status line, or give a message that
Check Pocket Status there are no unpocketed bodies.
Remove all pockets from the selected target body.

Remove Pocket
Settings
Show Target and Tool Hide all bodies other than those currently selected as targets and
bodies Only tools.
Break Association Break association of selected tools bodies and corresponding
pockets that are already created, or do not create association in
the current pocketing operation.

17

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 17-7


Creating pockets

Pocket Threaded Holes


Symbols For Threaded Holes
You can set pocket cutting to automatically create symbols for threaded holes.
In the Customer Defaults dialog box, Mold Wizard®Others®Pocket, select a
Thread Symbol option:
• None

• Simplified

• Offset Face

17

17-8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Creating pockets

Attributes for symbolic threads


Face attributes are copied from false bodies to the faces of the target body.
For example, you can transfer attributes for use by:
• The Holemaking application, for machining characteristics.

• The Drafting application for threaded hole representation.

You can customize files to control thread representations.


• In the screw model file, on the threaded face of the FALSE body, assign
the attribute name MW_HOLE_THREAD and the value 1.

• In the screw model file, you must create three named dimensions:
SCREW_DIA — The nominal major diameter of the screw.
THREAD_PITCH — The pitch or distance between adjacent threads.
TAP_DRILL_DIA — The tap drill diameter.

• In the var.prt there are expressions for key values in a series of screw
sizes. You can use these names instead of numeric values.
Please be aware that the variable TAP_DRILL_DIA is not read
from the var.prt file for assemblies created in NX 4 or later.
In current versions of NX, the value of the expression
TAP_DRILL_DIA, and all thread-related data, is taken from
the data file thread_standard_dat.xls (.xs4). This data file is the
source of the tap diameter data, even for standard parts where the
expression is written similarly to the following example for a 3 mm
screw:
TAP_DRILL_DIA=<UM_VAR>>::SCREW_TAP_DRILL_DIA_3
17

Values for the non-thread geometry for each screw are collected in several
attributes with the nominal size as a suffix.

Expressions in the var.prt file are exported to the spreadsheet, mw_var.xls


(xs4) or pdw_var.xls (xs4). Variables in mw_var.xls or pdw_var.xls are used if
the var.prt file is not loaded.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 17-9


Creating pockets

Activity
In the Creating pockets section, do the following activity:
• Slide and lifter pockets in the mouse assembly

17

17-10 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Creating pockets

Summary
This lesson introduced the Pocket command.
In this lesson you:
• Learned how to organize reference sets to make part work with pocket
design.

• Created pockets at two different assembly levels.

• Checked the status of pocket creation in a mold design.

17

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 17-11


17
Lesson

18 Drawings

Purpose
When the tool design has been completed, most companies create
documentation which includes assembly drawings and component drawings.
The purchasing agent will also require a Bill Of Materials to use when buying
the raw materials and standard mold components.

Objective
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Set up an Assembly Drawing.

• Set up a Component Drawing.

• Edit and generate a Bill of Material.

• Create a Hole Table.

18

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 18-1


Drawings

Mold Wizard drafting commands


The drawing commands automate documenting tooling assemblies:

Assembly Drawing — creates drawings from template files, adds up to


four predefined views. Controls component visibility by A and B side
attributes.

Component Drawing — from selected member components, creates


master model or self contained drawings from template files, and
optionally adds TOP, FRONT, or both views.

Bill of Material — manages attributes that support an associative parts


list note on a drawing.

Hole Table — creates a tabular note with information about all or


selected holes in a component.

18

18-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Drawings

Drawing overview

The Assembly Drawing and Component Drawing commands automate the


creation and management of die drawings. You can create drawings, import
predefined border patterns to the drawing, and create views.
You can make greater productivity gains by customizing template parts. You
can:
• Modify the default NX drawing template parts.

• Create new template parts.

The Assembly Drawing templates are in these directories:


/MOLDWIZARD/drafting/assembly_drawing/english
/MOLDWIZARD/drafting/assembly_drawing/metric

The Component Drawing templates are in these directories:


/MOLDWIZARD/drafting/component_drawing/english
/MOLDWIZARD/drafting/component_drawing/metric

See the online Help for more information about customization.

18

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 18-3


Drawings

Assembly Drawing

Use this command to create the assembly drawings in an existing assembly


or in a new assembly file using the master model approach.
Assembly Drawing uses the MW_SIDE attribute to control component
visibility in the drawing views. This attribute can be set to one of these:
• A — Assigns the components visibility to the TOPHALF view of the fixed
side of the mold base.

• B — Assigns the components visibility to the BOTTOMHALF view of


the moving part of the mold base.

• Hide — Hides the component in views.

18

18-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Drawings

Create assembly drawings

To create an assembly drawing sheet:

1. Click Assembly Drawing .

2. Select the Self-Contained or Master Model drawing type.

3. Choose a Metric or English template drawing size.

4. Type in a drawing name.

5. Click Apply.

To add views to an assembly drawing:

1. Click Assembly Drawing .

2. On the Visibility page, assign attribute values of A, B, or Hide.

3. On the View page, set the Scale and Visibility Control for the view to add.

4. Click Apply.

5. Repeat these steps for each additional view desired.

18

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 18-5


Drawings

Component drawing

Use the Component Drawing command to automate the creation and


management of drawings for components in the die assembly. You can:
• Create new drawings using master model or self-contained.
• Import predefined border patterns.
• Create views for each component in the assembly.

18

18-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Drawings

Create component drawings

To create a component drawing:

1. Click Component Drawing .

2. Select the desired components.

3. Right–click the selected components and choose Create Drawings.

18

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 18-7


Drawings

Bill of Material overview


You can use the Bill of Material command to manage attributes which support
an associative parts list note on a drawing.

The Bill of Material command name and the parts list are commonly referred
to by the acronym BOM.
You can export the bill of materials as a:
• Spreadsheet

• Web browser file

Application Mold Wizard


18 Toolbar
Mold Wizard®Bill of Material
Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Bill of
Material

18-8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Drawings

Using the Bill of Material command


BOM Record Edit

1. On the toolbar, click Bill of Material .

2. Select a row to edit. To select a row:


• In the BOM dialog box, in the List group, click a row in the list.

• In the graphics window, select a component .

• In the Assembly Navigator, select a component node.

3. Click a cell in the selected row to edit its contents.


You cannot edit the NO. and QTY columns.
Although you can edit the cells in the STOCK SIZE column, there
is a command to help you determine stock sizes and the values
automatically.

4. To complete an edit and keep the results, press Enter or click another cell.
You can press Escape to abandon an edit.

Add User Defined Components to the BOM


1. Select a component to add to the list. To select a component:
• In the graphics window, select a component.

• In the Assembly Navigator, select a component node.


You can select a component to add to the list any time the BOM
dialog box is open.
In the Select Component group, the Select Component command
is always available.
18

2. Select a component in the graphics window or in the Assembly Navigator.


If the Component you select does not have the attribute defined
as the key field in the parts list note, a Bill of Material dialog box
appears. You have a choice to:
• Click OK to add the part to the BOM and create a key attributes.

• Click Cancel to quit.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 18-9


Drawings

Export Excel
This command is available only for Windows users.

1. Right-click any row in the list, and choose Export to Excel.

2. In the Specify File dialog box, navigate to a folder for your spreadsheet
and enter a name for the file.

3. When the spreadsheet opens, if necessary, click the button to allow macros
to execute.

Export Excel
1. Right-click anywhere in the column titles row, and choose Export to
Spreadsheet.

2. (Optional) Use spreadsheet commands to save the temporary file.

Export to Browser
1. Right-click anywhere in the column titles row, and choose Export to
Browser.

2. (Optional) Use browser commands to save the temporary HTML file.

18

18-10 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Drawings

Bill of Material options


Select Component
Lets you select a component to add to the bill of material
list.
Select
Component
List
List Type Lets you specify which components are shown in the list:
• BOM List — Shows the components that appear in the
parts list.

• Hide List — Shows the components that are currently


hidden from the parts list, so that you can use a shortcut
command to show them.
List Rows represent standard parts in the assembly.
Columns represent calculated value for item number and
quantity, and part attribute value.
You can edit cells in a selected row by clicking them.
Exceptions: You cannot edit the NO. and QTY columns. You
cannot edit system-assigned attributes such as part names
if they appear in your parts list note.
You can right-click the column headings to choose an export
command:
• Export to Browser — Creates a temporary browser file
containing the contents of the list.

• Export to Spreadsheet — Creates a temporary


spreadsheet file containing the contents of the list.

18

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 18-11


Drawings

List You can right-click rows in the list to choose one of the
following commands:
• Edit Stock Size — For a single row selection, lets you
open the Stock Size dialog box.
For multiple row selections, calculates the stock sizes
according to the parameters set in the Settings group.
The dialog box is the same one you can open by

clicking Stock Size on the Mold Tools toolbar.

• Hide Component — Moves the selected component to


the Hide List display and removes it from the bill of
materials list and parts list.

• Show Component — Restores the selected component


to the BOM List display and shows it in the bill of
materials list and parts list.

• Component Information — Opens the Component


Information dialog box, which has a list showing the
name of the component part file.

• Export to Excel — Opens the Selection Dialog dialog


box to specify a path and file name, and then the Excel
program with a spreadsheet containing alternating
white and green rows and sorting options for every
column.

18

18-12 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Drawings

Settings
Stock Type Lets you choose:
• Box — Defines a box that bounds the solid body.

• Cylinder — Defines a cylinder that bounds the solid


body or lies within it.
Cylinder Type Lets you specify:
• Circumscribed — Defines a cylinder that surrounds
the solid body of the selected component.

• Inscribed — Defines the largest cylinder that lies


inside the solid body of the selected component.

Appears only when Cylinder is selected as the Stock


Type option.
Decimal Places Lets you enter a value between zero and six. The stock size
attribute value string uses the specified number of decimal
places.
Stock values are always rounded upwards.

18

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 18-13


Drawings

Hole Table overview


The Hole Table command lets you create a tabular note report for all the
holes in a component. The report produced contains:
• Holes placed into different categories based on hole diameter and hole
type.

• Hole categories arranged in increasing order of hole diameter.

• Holes in each category arranged in increasing order of distance from the


datum.

• Hole category ID, hole diameter, hole type, and depth of hole for each
category. You can customize the display of these attributes.

• Unique hole ID and coordinates displayed for each hole in each category.

There are several ways you can customize your hole table. Please
choose File®Utilities®Customer Defaults®Drafting®Hole Table.

Where Do I Find It?


Application Drafting
18 Prerequisite Drawing member view part with holes.
Toolbar
Mold Wizard®Hole Table
Menu Tools®Process Specific®Mold Wizard®Hole Table

18-14 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Drawings

Hole Table dialog box

18

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 18-15


Drawings

Hole Table options


Origin
Select Ordinate Select a location for the ordinate origin.
Origin
Holes
View Selection Lets you select a view from which to generate a hole report.
You can select a view from the graphics screen or the Views
List.
Window Selection Lets you select a visible view. The Views List is unavailable.
Select View Lets you select a view. This option becomes available after
you select an ordinate origin.
Select Hole Select the holes from which to generate a report.
Specify Table Select a location for the report. Both snap point and point
Origin constructor options are available to you.
Edit
Select Table Selects a hole table to edit.
Select Hole Lets you select holes to add to the table.
Settings
Quadrant Lets you specify a direction for positive dimensions. The
ordinate origin divides the view into four quadrants. You
can select one of the following options:
• Positive Quadrant I

• Positive Quadrant II

• Positive Quadrant III

• Positive Quadrant IV

• Positive Quadrant All


18

18-16 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Drawings

Create a Hole Table


Within the Drafting application, you can be in:
• The modeling state (View®Display Drawing deselected)

• The drawing state (View®Display Drawing selected)

You can create hole tables only in the drawing state.

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Hole Table .

2. Select an Ordinate Origin.

3. (Optional) In the Settings group, specify the positive quadrant.


For more information about positive quadrants, see Ordinate
Dimensions, Specifying Positive Quadrants

4. Specify holes by one of the following methods:


• View Selection — Select a view to include all hole types selected in
the customer defaults.

• Window Selection — Select individual holes

5. Specify a location for the origin of the table.

6. Click OK.

18

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 18-17


Drawings

Update a hole table

1. On the Mold Wizard toolbar, click Hole Table or choose


Insert®Table®Hole Table.

2. In the Hole Table dialog box, from the Type group, click Update Table.

3. Select a table in the graphics window.

4. Click Select Hole.

5. Select new holes to add to the table.

6. Click OK.

18

18-18 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Drawings

Activities
In the Drawings section, do the following activities:
• Assembly drawings and bill of materials

• Component drawing

• Hole table

18

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide 18-19


Drawings

Summary
You learned how the Drawing commands automate the setting up of tool
drawings and the creation of hole tables.
In this lesson you:
• Reviewed the Assembly Drawing command.

• Set up a Component Drawing.

• Created a Hole Report.

• Edited the bill of material.

18

18-20 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Appendix

A Additional projects

This appendix contains Additional Projects for you to work on.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide A-1


Additional projects

Automotive Grille

This part can be found in practice/auto_grille/front_grille.

A-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Additional projects

Battery case

This part can be found in practice/battery_case/mdp_battery_case.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide A-3


Additional projects

Coffee filter housing

This part can be found in practice/coffee/mdp_coffee.

A-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Additional projects

Saw case

This part can be found in practice/sawcover/mdp_sawcover.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide A-5


Additional projects

Mounting flange

This part can be found in practice/flange/mdp_flange.

A-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Additional projects

Axle frame

This part can be found in practice/wagon/mdp_axfram.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide A-7


Additional projects

Power tool casing

This part file can be found in practice/case2/mdp_case2.

A-8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Additional projects

Wagon bed

This part can be found in practice/wagon/mdp_bed.

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide A-9


A
Appendix

B Customizing Mold Wizard

Purpose
In this lesson you will learn how to expand tooling libraries by adding your
own standard parts in existing or new catalogs.

Objective
When you complete this lesson, you will be able to:
• Create a file structure for a new catalog in the standard parts library.

• Recognize which files control catalog entries in Standard Parts


Management and similar dialog boxes.

• Create and modify parameter lists on the catalog and dimension pages of
Standard Parts Management.

B
Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide B-1
Customizing Mold Wizard

Mold Wizard Templates and Libraries overview


Mold Wizard can be tailored to specific company processes by customizing the
various templates and libraries provided.

Configuration
The Configuration template is a predefined mold design “top” assembly
which is cloned to start a new mold design when using the Initialize Project
command. Several project templates are provided as a starting point for
your mold design assembly structure.

Materials Library
The Material Data Base is spreadsheet that includes material definition and
shrinkage factors. This spreadsheet information is utilized when you specify
the Part Material from the Initialize Project dialog box.

Standard Part Library


The Standard Part Library includes many standard part templates for die
components such as screws, springs, slides, and guides. Various standard
part supplier catalogs and universal (general) components are both available.

Mold Base Library


The Mold Base Library provides several pre-configured die bases. Various die
base supplier catalogs and universal (custom) die bases are both available.

B
B-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Customizing Mold Wizard

Customizing Standard Parts


The Standard Part library includes many standard part templates. This
library contains attributes, expressions, and spreadsheets used to control
the parts and can be customized so you can extend the library according
to your requirements.

Standard Parts Library Folder Structure


The Standard Parts Library uses a common folder structure as follows.
Under the $MOLDWIZARD_DIR/standard/english (or metric)/<catalog
name>/<part classification>/ you will find the following:
Standard This spreadsheet specifies the standard part’s data
Part Catalog location and name for NX model and data base
Registration spreadsheet.
spreadsheet (*.xls)
Standard Part This text file specifies the catalog name and the
Catalog location/name of the registration spreadsheet.
Registration file
(moldwizard_catalog.txt)
model This folder contains the NX part models (*.prt) of the
standard part.
data This folder contains the spreadsheets (*.xls & *.xs4) which
specify the standard part parameters and attributes.
bitmap This folder contains the standard part illustrations
(*.bmp) used to display the various expressions and
parameters that are used to control the standard part.
To avoid overwriting your libraries with subsequent releases of Mold
Wizard, and to more easily move your own libraries into newer
versions, it is recommended that you create a new catalog name for
your customized parts.

B
Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide B-3
Customizing Mold Wizard

Customizing Standard Parts


You can customize individual standard parts, or a standard parts as an
assembly. These procedures are described in the following sections.

Create a Standard Part


The procedure for creating a single standard part is as follows:
Step 1: Model a Standard Part
You can copy and modify a similar part from an existing standard part library
or create a new part from scratch.
1. Set the WCS to ABS (origin & orientation).

2. Create a Datum CSYS at desired coordinate system.

3. Create top-Z plane relative to X-Y plane by TOP_Z offsetting.

4. Build the part from the TOP_Z datum plane and adjust the position, if
necessary.

5. Create the Part body model and add to a “True” reference set.

6. Create the Pocket body model and add to a “False” reference set.

7. Move or copy the completed standard part to your


standard\metric\custom\model folder.

Step 2: Create the standard part registration spreadsheet


1. Copy a similar spreadsheet from an existing standard part library into
your standard\metric\custom\data folder.

2. Modify your spreadsheet to change the folder paths and filenames.

3. Modify your spreadsheet to change or add attributes, expressions, and


any key parameters you would like to control.
The Parameters section is displayed to the user in the Standard
Parts Management Dialog box as modifiable values.

B
B-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Customizing Mold Wizard

Step 3: Create Bitmaps illustrations


You can copy a similar bitmap image from an existing standard part library
and modify it, or create a new bitmap from scratch. You can create a bitmap
image by:
• Scanning the image from a catalog or photograph.

• Drawing the image with a graphics/photo editing software.

• Creating an NX Drawing of the standard part and exporting it as a .bmp


file.

• Using a screen capture tool to capture the image and saving it as a .bmp
file.

Move or copy the completed bitmap into your


standard\metric\custom\bitmap folder.

B
Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide B-5
Customizing Mold Wizard

Standard part registration


You register standard parts for use in the Mold Wizard libraries by the
addition of a registration text file to a folder in .../moldwizard/standard/englsih
or .../moldwizard/standard/metric.
Registration of standard parts uses two files:
• A text file named moldwizard_catalog.txt

• A registration spreadsheet designated in moldwizard_catalog.txt.

Edit the standard parts register file


You can access the standard parts register file for editing from the Mold
Wizard Standard Part Management dialog box. An NX part file must be open.
1. From the Standard Part Management dialog box, in the Catalog list,
select the catalog to be edited.

2. Click the Edit Register button.


This starts the spreadsheet application and opens the standard parts
register file (for editing).
The standard parts register file opens in the state that it was last saved.

Catalog Register Sheet Formatting


When you select a catalog name, Mold Wizard reads the spreadsheet file and
sheet name designated in the moldwizard_catalog.txt file and displays the
cells listed in the NAME column of the designated sheet in the Standard
Part Management dialog box list box.
For example, if you select the HASCO catalog option from an inch assembly,
Mold Wizard finds the file and page listed to the right of the word HASCO,
/standard/english/hasco/hasco_in.xs4::HASCO_IN. Mold Wizard reads the
database registry file named hasco_in.xls or hasco_in.xla, finds the page
named HASCO_IN, and loads the information from the NAME column into
the list box.
You can set the order of the available in Customer Defaults, in the Mold
Wizard section, Standard Parts options, on the Catalog Order page. You can
add both metric and inch unit catalog names to the same list. NX uses the
names that apply to the current units.

Register a new standard part


Since the new standard part does not belong to an existing catalog, we
will create a new CATALOG listing on the catalog register sheet. As an
example, the ENGLISH Catalog Register Sheet contains a listing of WATER
B in the catalog column, and WATER_IN in the corresponding SHEET_NAME

B-6 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Customizing Mold Wizard

column. Since WATER has been added to the CATALOG column, WATER
will be available in the Catalog pull-down menu of the Standard Part
Management dialog box.

Standard Parts Registration Text File


The standard parts registration text file contains the information for the
Standard Part Management System to find the register file for the standard
parts catalog.
The data format is as follows:
[CATALOG_NAME](in uppercase)[spaces][path to the register file for this
catalog]

Standard Parts Register Spreadsheet (Text File Method)


The standard parts register spreadsheet follows the same format as the
conventional standard parts register sheet except that it does not have a
catalog registry sheet for ENGLISH and METRIC. The standard parts
register file is typically filed in the data directory of the standard parts
catalog.

Data Base Register Sheet


Data base register sheets contain the file system path locations for:
1. Standard part models

2. Standard part database files

You must create a database registry sheet named WATER_IN to contain the
listing of model and database files belonging to the WATER catalog.
Note: The names listed in the SHEET_NAME column of the catalog
register sheet and the data base register sheet tabs are case-sensitive
and must match exactly.

Create a database register sheet


In the XESS spreadsheet application:
Edit > Insert > Insert Sheet

Rename a database register sheet


1. Select the tab on the sheet to rename to make it active.

2. Edit ® Set Sheet Name. Type in the desired sheet name. B


Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide B-7
Customizing Mold Wizard

Data base register sheet rows and columns


The database register sheet named WATER contains listings for standard
parts that belong to the water set of standard parts. The standard parts listed
on this sheet are available for selection from the Standard Part Management
dialog box after you select the water from the Catalog pull-down menu.

The top row


The database register file must contain a top row with five standard cells.

The NAME column


The NAME column contains the list of standard parts that will be displayed
in the list window of the Standard Part Management dialog box.
Some standard parts register sheets list a large number of standard parts.
For example, a catalog may contain several types of components: guide pins,
ejector pins, support columns, and others.
The groups of standard parts listed in the NAME column are divided into
groups by classification cells. Classification cells begin and end with a dash
(-) symbol. All standard parts listed below a classification cell belong to that
classification until the next classification cell. These classifications are found
in the Classification pull-down menu in the Standard Part Management
dialog box.
If you select an option from the Classification pull-down menu, the standard
parts displayed in the listing window is filtered to display only the standard
parts listed under the classification cell that was selected.

The DATA_PATH column


The DATA_PATH column contains the directory path to the directory
containing the standard parts database spreadsheet. The path specification
begins from the Mold Wizard directory. Any empty cell in the DATA_PATH
column uses the entry from the first filled cell found above.

The DATA column


The DATA column contains the file name of the database spreadsheet
corresponding to the standard part listed in the NAME column of the same
row.

The MOD_PATH column


The MOD_PATH column contains the directory path to the directory
containing the standard part model. The path specification begins from the
Mold Wizard directory. Any empty cell in the MOD_PATH column uses the
B entry from the first filled cell found above.

B-8 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Customizing Mold Wizard

The MODEL column


The MODEL column contains the file name of the part model corresponding
to the standard part listed in the NAME column of the same row.

The ACTION column


(Optional column) Specifies whether to clone or reference the library part.
Notice that different actions are used for Teamcenter Engineering.
Action Description
CLONE Clone from local machine
REFER Refer to template on local machine
TCE_CLONE Clone from Teamcenter Engineering
Refer to template in Teamcenter
TCE_REFER
Engineering

B
Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide B-9
Customizing Mold Wizard

Interchangeable standard parts


Common standard parts such as ejector pins are available from multiple
catalogs with similar form but different dimensions and BOM data.
The interchangeable standard part concept takes advantage of this similarity
by using a single model to represent as many catalogs as possible. This
sharing of models provides several advantages such as fewer part models,
uniform parameter naming, and easier expansion to support additional
catalogs.
The model, database, and bitmap files for all components
using the interchangeable concept are located in the directory
...moldwizard/standard/english (or metric)/interchangeable.

Model Files
Interchangeable standard parts share models as much as possible. Some
characteristics of interchangeable standard parts include uppercase
expression names and descriptive expression names.

Database Files
Like the model files, interchangeable standard parts also share database
files. Each interchangeable standard part database file can support multiple
catalogs by use of the multiple sheets in the file (one for each catalog).
When registering an interchangeable standard part that shares a single
database spreadsheet with multiple catalogs, you must name the tab on the
sheet and append the registered file path in the register file to match.
For example, an interchangeable standard part Locating Ring would use
the file:
locating_ring.xs4
If the spreadsheet supports multiple catalogs and one of the sheets is named
DME on the tab, the registered file name would be:
locating_ring.xs4::DME

Bitmap Files
Interchangeable standard parts also share a single bitmap image where
possible.

B
B-10 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Customizing Mold Wizard

Activity
In the Appendix: Customizing section, do the following activity:
• Standard part registration

B
Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide B-11
Customizing Mold Wizard

Mold base control files


There are two types of spreadsheets and a text file associated with the mold
base library.

Register spreadsheets
The mold base register file contains the information required by the mold
base management system to do the following:
• Configure the dialog box options.

• Control the location of library models, database spreadsheets, and bitmap


images.

Database spreadsheets
The database file contains the data required to define the dimensions and
options for a particular family of mold bases.
You can modify mold base dimensions by editing database controlled
expressions in the expression edit field and pressing Enter. The mold base is
not updated until you click OK or Apply.

moldwizard_catalog.txt
The mold base registration text file contains the information for the software
to find register files for mold base catalogs. English and metric versions of
this file must be located and named as the following:
• [MOLDWIZARD_DIR]\moldbase\metric\ moldwizard_catalog.txt

• [MOLDWIZARD_DIR]\moldbase\english\ moldwizard_catalog.txt

In the preceding, [MOLDWIZARD_DIR] represents the portion of the


path set by the MOLDWIZARD_DIR environment variable.

B
B-12 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Customizing Mold Wizard

Mold base database spreadsheet


The database spreadsheet for a mold base contains the data required to
define the default dimensions and options that appear in the Mold Base
Design dialog box.
Mold base database spreadsheets recognize specific, case-sensitive, formatting
rules that must be followed exactly. Among the specific requirements are
the following:
• The maximum number of columns in a spread sheet is 78.

• The top row in a spread sheet may not be empty.

• The cell format of a spread sheet should be Text.

When you enter numeric values in a spreadsheet cell, the default is to


format the cell as a number. You must change the format to text. You
can format one or more cells as text, or in Excel you can enter a single
quote character (’) as the first character in the number.

The mold base database file has the following sections:


• SHEET_TYPE

• ATTRIBUTES

• INTER_PART

• EXPRESSION

• STANDARD_LIST

• PARAMETERS

B
Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide B-13
Customizing Mold Wizard

Summary
This lesson introduced the standard part library structure and how customize
a Standard Part.
In this lesson you:
• Organized your library file structure to extend the Mold Wizard standard
parts library.

• Added a simple part to a library and manipulated available parameters


that appear in Standard Parts Management.

B
B-14 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Index

A D

Active product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Default File Settings


MW_HideObjectLayer . . . . . . . . 8-22
MW_PartingPatchBodyLayer . . . 8-22
C
Delete Files
Cavity Layout dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Circular constant layouts . . . . . . 6-15 Manage unused parts . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Circular radial layouts . . . . . . . . 6-12 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
common options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 Design Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Create a circular layout . . . . . . . 6-19 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Create a linear layout . . . . . . . . . 6-18 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
Create a rectangular balanced Drawing
layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Assembly Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
options Component Drawing . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
Cavity pocket options . . . . . . 6-30 Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Circular layout options . . . . . 6-27
Linear layout options . . . . . . 6-26 E
Rectangular balanced layout
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 Edge Patch
Transform cavity options . . . 6-28 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Edit Parting and Patch Surface
Rectangular balanced layouts Identify an existing surface as a patch
Four-cavity layouts . . . . . . . . . 6-6 sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Two-cavity layouts . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Ejector Pin Post Processing
Rectangular linear layouts . . . . . . 6-9 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
Rotate cavities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Transform cavities from point to Electrode Design
point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 Legacy Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Translate cavities . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Create Box Standard Part Approach . . . . . . . 16-2
dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Enlarge Surface
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Create a patch sheet by enlarging a
Customizing surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30, 8-32
Mold base database dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Mold base spreadsheets . . . . . . . B-12 Extend Solid

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide Index-1


Index

dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79


Extend a solid face . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
M
F Merge Cavities
Family Mold dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Change the active product . . . . . . 7-6 Merge cavities into a single insert
Create a family mold assembly . . . 7-5 Subtract workpieces from a common
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Unite multiple workpieces . . 8-57
Active product . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Assembly structure . . . . . . . . 7-3 Mold Base
Position and orientation of family Add a mold base from a standard
components . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Remove a family product . . . . . . . 7-7 Configure a universal mold
base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Configure an interchangeable mold
G base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Gate Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Gate Point Indication . . . . . . . . . 14-3 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Gates and Runners Mold Cooling Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Gate Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Cooling Standard Part Library . . 15-12
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Mold CSYS
Runner Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Mold Parting Tools
Model Compare
I
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89
Initialize Project Patch Surface overview . . . . . . . . 9-41
Creating a new project . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Mold Tools
Family molds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Create Box dialog box . . . . . . . . . 8-16
How to Create Box overview . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Add a product to an Create reference blends . . . . . . . 8-51
assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Define a trimmed region of faces as a
Create a new tooling patch sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Design Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Open an existing project . . . . . 2-5 Design Inserts dialog box . . . . . . 8-63
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Design Inserts overview . . . . . . . 8-61
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Extend a solid face . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
related topics Extend Solid dialog box . . . . . . . . 8-49
ESI template assembly . . . . . 2-15 Extend Solid overview . . . . . . . . 8-46
Overwriting Safeguard . . . . . . 2-7 Interference Check overview . . . . 8-79
Product template Merge Cavities dialog box . . . . . . 8-59
assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Merge cavities into a single
Top level template insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Merge Cavities overview . . . . . . . 8-55
Interference Check overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Index-2 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Index

Parting Check overview . . . . . . . 8-74 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78


Patch Surfaces related topics . . . 9-44 Define Regions
Patching process overview . . . . . . 8-4 Create cavity and core regions and
Projection Area overview . . . . . . 8-81 parting lines . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Reference Blend dialog box . . . . . 8-53 Define new regions . . . . . . . . 9-49
Reference Blend overview . . . . . . 8-50 Define regions by seed and boundary
Replace Solid dialog box . . . . . . . 8-45 faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Replace Solid overview . . . . . . . . 8-42 options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Solid Patch dialog box . . . . . . . . . 8-21 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Solid Patch overview . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Design Parting Surface . . . . . . . . 9-68
Split a solid associatively . . . . . . 8-18 Create Parting Surfaces dialog
Split Solid dialog box . . . . . . . . . 8-19 box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71
Split Solid overview . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
Trim Region Patch overview . . . . 8-24 Edit Parting and Patch Surface
Trim Solid dialog box . . . . . . . . . 8-40 Identify an existing surface as a
Trim Solid overview . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 patch sheet . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Using the Replace Solid overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43 Guide Line
Using the Trim Solid command . . 8-38 Auto Create Guide Lines . . . 9-62
Create and edit guide lines . . 9-63
P options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Part Name Management Simple guide line creation and
How to editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61
Access the Part Name Management Model Compare
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-87
Change the default for the Rename Mold parting tools overview . . . . 9-31
Components check box . . 2-18 Parting components . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Enter a custom name . . . . . . 2-18 Assembly structure . . . . . . . 9-26
Set All Names . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Parting related part files . . . 9-27
Set Selected Names . . . . . . . 2-19 Parting methods overview . . . . . . 9-20
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Parting elements . . . . . . . . . 9-20
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Parting Navigator overview . . . . 9-32
related topics Parting terminology
Name conflict with existing Guide lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Parting lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Setting a name rule . . . . . . . 2-22 Parting surfaces . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Parting Patch sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Back Up Parting/Patch Sheets Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-94 Swap Model
Cavity and core parting trim options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86
results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83
Define Cavity and Core Swap the product model for a new
Create tooling trimmed bodies one version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-84
by one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79 Traverse Parting Lines
dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide Index-3


Index

Trim-based parting process overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33


Confirm product model Split faces
readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Split faces by datum plane . . 9-36
Trim based cavity and core Split faces by isocline . . . . . . 9-34
bodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Split Solid
Parting Check dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Patch Surface Split a solid associatively . . . . . . 8-18
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41 Standard Part
Patch Surfaces Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
related topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 Standard Parts
Patching process overview . . . . . . . . 8-4 Components, Component Assemblies,
Pocket and Component Sets . . . . . . . 12-8
Attributes for symbolic threads . . 17-9 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Checking pocket status . . . . . . . . 17-5 Standard Part Management
Creating new pockets . . . . . . . . . 17-4 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Deleting pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5 Sub-insert Library
dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6 Design a Sub-insert using the
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
When to create . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Symbols For Threaded Holes . . . . 17-8
Projection Area
T
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81
Trim Mold Components
R dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Reference Blend Trim a component with an existing trim
Create reference blends . . . . . . . 8-51 sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53 Trim Region Patch
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50 Define a trimmed region of faces as a
Replace Solid patch sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42 Trim Solid
Using the Replace Solid dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Using the Trim Solid command
Create and shape a box . . . . 8-38
S
Edit a bounding box . . . . . . . 8-39
Shrinkage
Shrinkage overview . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 U
Use the Shrinkage command . . . . 3-4
Solid Patch Unused Part Management
dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Empty the recycle bin . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Split Face overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Remove files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Index-4 Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide mt10420_s — NX 8 — Copyright 2011 Siemens PLM Software
Index

Restore files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Product Workpiece, extrude


sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
W Product Workpiece, Reference
WAVE Control Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75 Specify a user defined body . . . 5-6
Workpiece library parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Add stock to mold plates and trim as options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
cavity and core . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Define Pocket mold plates and unite
Add a Workpiece Library inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 User-defined workpiece bodies . . 5-13
Product Workpiece, Distance
Allowance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Mold Wizard Design Process — Student Guide Index-5


Reference tear-out pages
These reference tear-out pages are provided for your convenience. The
following pages are included:
• An overview of Siemens Learning Advantage

• A Student Profile sheet that your instructor may have you complete at
the beginning of the course

• The course agenda

• Evaluation sheets for the course delivery and the course materials. You
may also be given information about filling these out online.
This page left blank intentionally.
Siemens Learning Advantage
Maximize your PLM investment with e-Learning!

Siemens Learning Advantage is a convenient,


easy to use e-Learning portal that provides cost-
and time-effective methods for users to gain
skills and knowledge of Siemens PLM Software
solutions. It contains an unparalleled library
of self-paced courses and assessments, as well
as management tools for companies to measure
learning progress and to administer learning
programs.
Competitive advantage
Siemens Learning Advantage courses present consistent methods and concepts approved
by Siemens. Our course development teams work closely with Product Development to
ensure that prescribed processes reflect the intended product usage and industry best
practices. No other training provider can make this claim! And because our learning
products are coordinated with Siemens product releases, you can be confident that
training will be delivered in time for your upgrade.
Benefits include:
• Simple user interface requiring only a standard internet browser.
• On-demand internet access to self-paced courses and assessments.
• Extensive self-paced library supporting a broad range of Siemens products and
versions.
• Online learning management system for tracking and reporting training progress.
• Memberships renew on an annual basis and provide uninterrupted access to courses.

Learn more about Siemens Learning Advantage by visiting our web site or contact your
Siemens PLM Software sales representative for purchase information.
This page left blank intentionally.
PLM Software
www.siemens.com/plm

Student Profile
To stay in touch with our customers, we are asking for some background information. We will keep this information confidential and
will not share this with anyone outside Education Services. Please print your information.

Your name _____________________________________________________________________________________ U.S. citizen? Yes No

Course title: [unresolved entity: courseTitle] Dates: _____________ thru _____________

Hotel/motel while training: __________________________________________________ Planned departure time after class: ________________

Employer _____________________________________________________________ Location ______________________________________________

Supervisor/manager: _______________________________________________ Emergency contact phone: _________________________________

Your job title and responsibilities ______________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Industry: Automotive Aerospace Consumer products Machining Tooling Medical Other

Types of products/parts/data that you work with: ________________________________________________________________________________

Platform (operating system): ______________________________________________

Reason for training: __________________________________________________________________________________________________________

List any training you have had for Siemens PLM Software products, such as NX, I-deas, Imageware, Teamcenter Manufacturing,
Teamcenter Engineering, Teamcenter Enterprise, Tecnomatix, or Dimensional Management/Visualization.

Instructor-led
Software Training provided by: When Course name
or self-paced?

Other CAD/CAM/CAE/PLM software you have used: ____________________________________________________________________________

Please indicate your experience with the following:

Thank you for your participation. We hope our training meets your expectations.
This page left blank intentionally.
Course agenda — Mold Wizard Design Process
Day 1 Morning

• Introduction & course overview


• Lesson 1 – Review the online Help tutorial
• Lesson 2 – Initializing a mold design project

Afternoon

• Lesson 3 – Shrinkage
• Lesson 4 – Mold CSYS
• Lesson 5 – Workpiece
• Lesson 6– Cavity Layout

Day 2 Morning

• Lesson 7– Family molds


• Projects – Family and layout
• Lesson 8 – Mold Tools

Afternoon

• Lesson 8 – Mold Tools (continued)


• Projects – Mold Tools

Day 3 Morning

• Lesson 9 – Partings
• Projects – Parting sheets
• Projects – Trim and Extend partings

Afternoon

• Lesson 10 – Mold Design Validation


• Lesson 11 – Mold Base
• Projects – Standard Mold Base
• Projects – Universal Mold Base
• Projects – Interchangeable Mold Base

Day 4 Morning

• Lesson 12 – Standard Parts

Afternoon

• Projects – Add Standard Parts


• Projects – Cavity side ejectors
• Projects – Ejector pin post processing
• Lesson 13 – Sub-insert Library
• Lesson 14 – Gates and Runners

Day 5 Morning

• Lesson 15 – Mold Cooling Tools


• Lesson 16 – Electrode Design

Afternoon

• Lesson 17 – Creating Pockets


• Lesson 18 – Drawings
• (Optional) Appendix – Customizing Mold Wizard
This page left blank intentionally.
Siemens PLM Software – Delivery Evaluation
Your name: ____________________________________________________________
Course title: Mold Wizard Design Process
Course #: mt10420 Dates: _____________________________
Instructor: _____________________________________________________________
Siemens PLM Software – Courseware Evaluation
Your name: ____________________________________________________________
Course title: Mold Wizard Design Process
Course #: mt10420 Dates: _____________________________

Name (optional): _____________________________________ Location/room ________________

If you would prefer to fill out an evaluation online, please go to the following URL:
http://training.industrysoftware.automation.siemens.com/eval/

Session ID: ______________________ (provided by instructor). Must be completed within two weeks.

Thank you for your business. We hope you will consider us for your future training and
professional development.